ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide

Transcription

ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
This page is intentionally left blank.
Preface
This guide provides a variety of basic information about Web GUI for the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/
DX90. It should be referred to when setting up and maintaining the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/
DX90.
This guide is specially written for ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI system administrators
and operators.
Knowledge of UNIX or Windows® systems is required.
Seventh Edition
January 2013
Structure of This Manual
This manual consists of the following eight chapters and three appendices.
● Chapter 1 Outline
This chapter describes the outlines, features, operation environment, and operating topology
for GUI.
● Chapter 2 Startup and Shutdown
This chapter describes how to start, exit, log on and log off from GUI, and information about
operation screens.
● Chapter 3 Initial Setup
This chapter describes the Initial Setup menu.
● Chapter 4 Status Menu
This chapter describes the status display menu for the device.
● Chapter 5 Configuration
This chapter describes the configuration related menu.
Details for Configuration Wizard, RAID group management, volume management, and
Advanced Copy management are provided.
● Chapter 6 Global Settings
This chapter describes the user management, network settings, remote support settings,
system settings, and Host I/F (host interface) management.
● Chapter 7 Maintenance
This chapter describes the hardware maintenance procedures.
3
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Preface
● Chapter 8 Display and Download Information (Diagnosis)
This chapter describes how to display and download ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 related
information.
"Install Site Certificate", "Factory Default List", and "The Maximum Number of Concurrent
Volume Formats" are described in the appendices.
Latest Information
The information in this document is subject to change without notice for functionality expansion
of ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 and improvement. The latest version of this document and the
latest information about the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is released in the following web-site.
Access the following address if needed.
http://www.fujitsu.com/global/services/computing/storage/eternus/products/diskstorage/dxentry/
Related Materials
Other manuals for the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 are as follows:
• ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Disk storage systems User Guide
• ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 CLI User Guide
• ETERNUS Disk storage systems User's Guide -Server Connection- (*1)
*1:
Download the required manuals for your device environment (server OS and host interface type, etc.)
from the specified web site. Refer to the Documentation CD provided with the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/
DX90 for URLs of the manual download site.
4
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Preface
Acknowledgments
• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Server are either registered trademarks or trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.
• UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other countries.
• Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates.
• AIX is a trademark of IBM Corp.
• Red Hat is a registered trademark of Red Hat, Inc.
• Linux is a trademark of Linus Torvalds.
• HP-UX is a trademark of Hewlett-Packard in the U.S. and other countries.
• VMware, VMware logos, Virtual SMP, and VMotion are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of VMware, Inc. in the U.S. and/or other countries.
• Egenera BladeFrame and Egenera PAN Manager are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Egenera, Inc. in the USA and other countries.
• VERITAS Volume Manager is a trademark of Symantec Corp. and its affiliated companies.
• Mozilla, Firefox, and the Mozilla and Firefox logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of
the Mozilla Foundation in the United States and other countries.
• Other company names, product names, and service names are registered trademarks or
trademarks of their respective owners.
Abbreviations
The following products will be represented throughout this manual by the following abbreviations.
• Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Server operating system and Microsoft® Windows® 2000
Advanced Server operating system are abbreviated as Windows® 2000.
• Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003, Standard Edition, and Microsoft® Windows Server®
2003, Enterprise Edition are abbreviated as Windows Server® 2003.
• Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008, Standard Edition, and Microsoft® Windows Server®
2008, Enterprise Edition are abbreviated as Windows Server® 2008.
• Windows® Server refers to both the Windows Server® 2003 and Windows Server® 2008.
• Windows® refers to all the Windows products listed here: Windows® 2000, Windows Server®
2003, and Windows Server® 2008.
• Oracle Solaris might be described as Solaris, Solaris Operating System, or Solaris OS.
Microsoft product screen shot(s) reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.
5
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Table of Contents
Chapter 1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
Outline ................................................................................................................ 9
Features ........................................................................................................... 10
Operating Environment .................................................................................... 11
Operating Topology .......................................................................................... 12
Chapter 2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.5.1
2.5.2
Outline .......................................................................................9
Startup and Shutdown ...........................................................13
Startup .............................................................................................................. 13
Logon ............................................................................................................... 15
Logoff ............................................................................................................... 17
Exit ................................................................................................................... 18
Operation Screens ........................................................................................... 19
Screen structures ...................................................................................................................... 19
User Role ................................................................................................................................... 20
Chapter 3
Initial Setup .............................................................................26
Chapter 4
Status Menu ............................................................................44
4.1
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.3
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
Storage System Status .................................................................................... 44
Storage System ......................................................................................................................... 48
Controller Enclosure .................................................................................................................. 49
Drive Enclosure ......................................................................................................................... 54
RAID Group Status .......................................................................................... 57
Volume Status .................................................................................................. 59
Advanced Copy Status ..................................................................................... 61
Advanced Copy Path Status ............................................................................ 63
REC Buffer Status ............................................................................................ 65
Chapter 5
5.1
5.2
5.2.1
5.2.2
5.2.3
5.2.4
5.2.5
5.2.6
Configuration..........................................................................66
Configuration Wizard ........................................................................................ 66
RAID Group Management ................................................................................ 88
Create RAID Group ................................................................................................................... 88
Delete RAID Group .................................................................................................................... 93
Assign Hot Spare ....................................................................................................................... 94
Release Hot Spare .................................................................................................................... 96
Logical Device Expansion ......................................................................................................... 98
Set RAID Group Name ............................................................................................................ 101
6
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Table of Contents
5.2.7
5.2.8
5.3
5.3.1
5.3.2
5.3.3
5.3.4
5.3.5
5.3.6
5.3.7
5.3.8
5.3.9
5.3.10
5.4
5.4.1
5.4.2
5.4.3
5.4.4
5.4.5
5.4.6
5.4.7
5.4.8
5.4.9
5.4.10
Set Eco-mode Schedule .......................................................................................................... 102
Change CM Ownership ........................................................................................................... 109
Volume Management ..................................................................................... 111
Create Volume ......................................................................................................................... 111
Delete Volume ......................................................................................................................... 114
Format Volume ........................................................................................................................ 116
Encrypt Volume ....................................................................................................................... 118
LUN Concatenation ................................................................................................................. 120
RAID Migration ........................................................................................................................ 122
Initialize Snap Data Volume .................................................................................................... 126
Release Reservation ............................................................................................................... 128
Set Volume Name ................................................................................................................... 130
Configure LUN Mapping .......................................................................................................... 131
Advanced Copy Management ........................................................................ 139
Setup Snap Data Pool ............................................................................................................. 146
Manage Copy Session ............................................................................................................ 152
Register Copy License ............................................................................................................ 155
Modify Copy Parameters ......................................................................................................... 156
Modify EC/OPC Priority ........................................................................................................... 158
Modify Copy Table Size ........................................................................................................... 160
Set Copy Path ......................................................................................................................... 164
Modify Port Mode .................................................................................................................... 184
Modify REC Multiplicity ............................................................................................................ 186
Modify REC Buffer ................................................................................................................... 188
Chapter 6
6.1
6.1.1
6.1.2
6.1.3
6.2
6.2.1
6.2.2
6.2.3
6.2.4
6.2.5
6.2.6
6.2.7
6.3
6.3.1
6.3.2
6.3.3
6.3.4
6.3.5
6.3.6
Global Settings .....................................................................192
User Management .......................................................................................... 192
Setup User Account ................................................................................................................. 192
Change User Password ........................................................................................................... 195
Initialize User Account ............................................................................................................. 197
Network Settings ............................................................................................ 199
Setup Network Environment .................................................................................................... 199
Setup SNMP Agent ................................................................................................................. 203
Download MIB File .................................................................................................................. 208
Perform SNMP Trap Test ........................................................................................................ 209
Setup E-Mail Notification ......................................................................................................... 210
Display SMTP Log ................................................................................................................... 213
Renew SSL Certificate ............................................................................................................ 214
Remote Support ............................................................................................. 216
Display Support Information .................................................................................................... 216
Display Communication Log .................................................................................................... 217
Setup Remote Support ............................................................................................................ 218
Update Customer Information ................................................................................................. 226
Update Communication Environment Information ................................................................... 228
Setup Log Sending Parameters .............................................................................................. 230
7
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Table of Contents
6.3.7
6.4
6.4.1
6.4.2
6.4.3
6.4.4
6.4.5
6.4.6
6.4.7
6.5
6.5.1
6.5.2
6.5.3
6.5.4
Stop/Restart Remote Support ................................................................................................. 233
System Settings ............................................................................................. 235
Modify Date and Time ............................................................................................................. 235
Modify Storage System Name ................................................................................................. 237
Setup Encryption Mode ........................................................................................................... 238
Change Box ID ........................................................................................................................ 240
Setup Power Management ...................................................................................................... 242
Setup Subsystem Parameters ................................................................................................. 243
Setup Event Notification .......................................................................................................... 245
Host I/F Management .................................................................................... 252
Set Port Parameters ................................................................................................................ 254
Setup Host ............................................................................................................................... 263
Setup Host Response .............................................................................................................. 275
Modify Reset Group ................................................................................................................. 282
Chapter 7
7.1
7.1.1
Hot Expansion ................................................................................................ 285
Add Drive Enclosure ................................................................................................................ 286
Chapter 8
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
Maintenance..........................................................................285
Display and Download Information (Diagnosis)................289
Display Event Log .......................................................................................... 289
Export/Delete Log .......................................................................................... 290
Export Panic Dump ........................................................................................ 293
Start/Stop Performance Monitoring ................................................................ 296
Display Performance Information ................................................................... 299
Display Error Information ............................................................................... 300
Appendix A Install Site Certificate...........................................................302
A.1
A.2
For Internet Explorer ....................................................................................... 302
For Firefox ....................................................................................................... 307
Appendix B Factory Default List..............................................................310
Appendix C The Maximum Number of Concurrent Volume Formats ...329
Index
.......................................................................................................331
8
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 1
Outline
This chapter describes the outlines, features, operating environment, and operating topology for
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI (hereinafter referred to as "GUI").
GUI is installed in controllers of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 (hereinafter also referred to as
"the device"), and used for performing settings and maintenance via web browser.
1.1
Outline
Use GUI to set the operating environment and check status for the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/
DX90.
GUI can be operated from a web browser by connecting the PC via a LAN connection.
*1
Operation
Server
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90
LAN
Management Server
Mail Server Program
PC
GUI
Web Browser
Operating via
web browser
*1: Connect the operation server and the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90
with a Fibre Channel (FC), iSCSI, or SAS cable.
Refer to "2.1 Startup" (page 13) for details of GUI start up.
9
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 1 Outline
1.2 Features
1.2
Features
The features for GUI are as follows:
● Initial and basic settings by the wizard
The wizard enables you to set the minimum requirement to run the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/
DX90 by following the instructions on the wizard screen.
● System status
This function displays the device installation image.
● Disk configuration check function
This function displays a list of disks. It is also possible to display the number of constructible
RAID groups by specifying the RAID group configuration requirements.
● Checking the extent of a failure
If a disk failure occurs, "Host Port", "Affinity Group", "Volume", "RAID group", and "installation
location" can be referenced to determine the extent of the failure.
● Easy operation
If a hardware failure is detected, the system administrator can receive a mail containing
detected failure information.
10
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 1 Outline
1.3 Operating Environment
1.3
Operating Environment
The following PC environment is required to use GUI.
Confirmed operating environment
Browsers
Image resolution
Version
Microsoft Internet Explorer
6.0, 7.0, or 8.0
Mozilla Firefox
3.0.x, 3.5.x, or 3.6.x
1024 x 768 or more
−
Enable or disable the following items as the browser.
Item
Setting value
Temporary Internet Files (Cache)
Disable
Style Sheet
Enable
JavaScript
Enable
Cookie
Enable
Proxy Server
Disable
The following example shows how to set internet options when using Internet Explorer:
• General (Temporary Internet files and Style Sheet)
Specify the following parameters.
- Temporary Internet files
Select [Every visit to the page] in [Check for newer versions of stored
pages].
- Accessibility
Clear all the checkboxes in [Formatting] and [User style sheet] fields.
• Security (JavaScript)
Specify one of the following items.
- Custom Level
Select [Enable] for [Active scripting].
- Trusted Sites
Add the URL of ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90.
• Privacy (Cookie)
Specify the following items.
- Advanced
Select the method for handling Cookies in [Per-Site Privacy Actions].
- Sites
When allowing Cookies for the specified Web site, add the URL of
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 in [Manage Sites].
• Connections (Proxy Server)
Specify one of the following items in [LAN Settings].
- Clear the [Use a proxy server for your LAN] checkbox.
- Click the [Advanced] button, and add the address for ETERNUS
DX60/DX80/DX90 in [Exceptions] field.
11
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 1 Outline
1.4 Operating Topology
1.4
Operating Topology
GUI can be operated by a PC or workstation with a web browser installed, that is connected via a
LAN.
Two connection topologies are allowed:
• Direct connection of the PC to the device
• Network connection via an existing LAN
The operating topology diagram below shows a direct connection with a LAN cable.
Set by direct
connection
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90
Setting PC
*1
*1: Connect the setting PC and the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 with a LAN cable.
Either a straight through or crossover LAN cable can be used.
The operating topology diagram below shows operation on an existing network.
PC
Setting PC
Set via network
LAN
Operation server
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90
*2
*2: Connects the operation server and the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 using a Fibre Channel (FC), iSCSI, or SAS cable.
12
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 2
Startup and Shutdown
This chapter describes how to start, exit, log on and log off from GUI, and information about
operation screens.
2.1
Startup
Startup the logon screen for GUI.
Connect the PC and the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 using a LAN cable, and display the logon
screen via the web browser.
The procedure to start up the logon screen for GUI is as follows:
Procedure
1
Directly connect the PC and MNT port of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 via
LAN cable.
2
Set the IP address and subnet mask for the PC to match the ETERNUS DX60/
DX80/DX90 network settings.
3
Enter the URL to the address bar in the web browser.
Specify "http://IP address of the device/" or "https://IP address of the device" (Default IP
address is "192.168.1.1").
→ The logon screen for GUI is displayed. Refer to "2.2 Logon" (page 15) for detailed
procedure to logon.
13
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 2 Startup and Shutdown
2.1 Startup
The confirmation screens for site certificate may be displayed when
using SSL (https) to start up GUI (the display contents vary
according to your web browser).
However, this should not cause any problems. Accept the site
certificate and continue the process.
The following shows an example when using Internet Explorer 7.
There is a problem with this website's security certificate. The
security certificate presented by this website was not issued by
a trusted certificate authority.
Security certificate problems may indicate an attempt to fool you
or intercept data you send to the server.
We recommend that you close this webpage and do not continue to this Web site.
This warning will not be displayed after installing the site information.
Refer to "Appendix A Install Site Certificate" (page 302) for
procedure to install the site certificate to the your web browser.
• Refer to "6.2.1 Setup Network Environment" (page 199) for
procedure to set the IP address of the MNT port.
• The following ports should be used for http and https connections:
Protocol
Port to be used (Default)
http
80
https
443
End of procedure
14
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 2 Startup and Shutdown
2.2 Logon
2.2
Logon
Log on to GUI to start the operation. The GUI operation screen appears.
The menu displayed pertains to the logged on user role. An Advanced privilege user (CE) can
access various maintenance/settings menus, a Standard user (SE) has operational access, and
a Monitor user (general user) can access the status display menus.
The following will cause an error. If this occurs, note the error message and
try re-logging on after completing the process.
• Attempting to logon while four users are already logged on.
• Attempting to logon while another application is already logged on.
The procedure for logging on is as follows:
Procedure
1
Select the language (English or Japanese) from the logon screen.
2
Enter the Username and Password, and click the [Logon] button.
The Username and the Password vary depending on which account is being used to
logon.
• Username
root
• Password
root (Default)
• Refer to "6.1 User Management" (page 192) for user accounts.
• If the input error occurs, enter the Username and Password again
to log on to the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90.
15
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 2 Startup and Shutdown
2.2 Logon
→ The operation screen appears.
Up to four users can be logged on concurrently. Logging on five or
more users is not allowed.
Also note that when attempting to logon, another user is already
logged on and performing one of the following operations, a warning
message appears and some functions cannot be used. Confirm the
current GUI usage state and start operation.
• Applying controller firmware
• Applying disk firmware
• RAID group diagnosis
• Disk diagnosis
End of procedure
16
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 2 Startup and Shutdown
2.3 Logoff
2.3
Logoff
Log off from GUI to finish the operation.
If no operation is performed for a specified period of time (60 minutes) after
logging on, the relevant user is automatically logged off.
The procedure for logging off is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Logoff] link on the top right of the screen.
→ A confirmation screen appears.
2
Click the [OK] button.
→ This completes the logging off process.
The logon screen appears.
End of procedure
17
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 2 Startup and Shutdown
2.4 Exit
2.4
Exit
Exit from GUI.
Make sure to perform "2.3 Logoff" (page 17) operation before exiting GUI.
If exiting GUI without logging off, the logon status is not released.
The procedure to exit is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Close] button for the web browser.
→ Exit from GUI.
The logon screen does not appear.
End of procedure
18
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 2 Startup and Shutdown
2.5 Operation Screens
2.5
Operation Screens
This section provides a description about GUI operation screens.
Click the [Help] link or [Help] button for a detailed explanation of the functions used during operation. An explanation (help) screen of the function is displayed.
• Be sure to log off after all necessary operations are completed.
• If the operation screen is not updated when accessing GUI, close the
web browser, and log on again.
2.5.1
Screen structures
The following shows the main contents that configure the operation screen. They are always displayed.
● Global Header
ETERNUS DX60, ETERNUS DX80, or ETERNUS DX90 logo, [Logoff] and [Help] links,
general status, device serial number, and date and time are displayed in the Global Header.
General status of ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is displayed as an image with character
strings.
● Menu Bar
Clicking the tabs in the menu bar displays sub menus related to the selected function.
Clicking the sub menu with the "T" symbol displays pull-down menu options.
19
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 2 Startup and Shutdown
2.5 Operation Screens
● Title Bar
The current function name is displayed.
2.5.2
User Role
The available menus for GUI will differ according to the account type.
The following table shows the difference between user roles.
User role
Available functions
Default account
Advanced
"Advanced" is a maintenance engineer privilege.
Setting maintenance such as status display, configuration
management, and maintenance functions are available.
f.ce
Standard
"Standard" is a system administrator privilege.
Functions such as status display and configuration
management are available.
root
Monitor
"Monitor" is a general user privilege.
Only the status display function is available.
None
● Settings and functions for an Advanced privilege user
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Initial Setup
Status
Volume Settings
Global Settings
Maintenance
Diagnosis
Utilities
● Settings and functions for a Standard privilege user
•
•
•
•
•
•
Initial Setup
Status
Volume Settings
Global Settings
Maintenance (Add Drive Enclosures)
Diagnosis
● Settings and functions for a Monitor privilege user
• Status
• Diagnosis (Display Event Log and Display Performance Information)
20
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 2 Startup and Shutdown
2.5 Operation Screens
When specifying a Slave CM IP address for accessing the logon screen,
the following GUI functions can be used.
• Settings and functions for an Advanced privilege user
- Status
- Maintenance (Change Master CM)
• Settings and functions for a Standard privilege user
- Status
• Settings and functions for a Monitor privilege user
- Status
The following table shows the availability of functions for each user role.
Chapter
Category
User Role
Function
Monitor
Standard
Advanced
Startup and
Shutdown
Logon
OK
OK
OK
Logoff
OK
OK
OK
Initial Setup
Set Date and Time
−
OK
OK
Set Storage System Name
−
OK
OK
Change Password
−
OK
OK
−
OK
OK
−
OK
OK
(*1)
Modify FC Port Mode
Set Port Parameters
Status Menu
Setup Network Environment
−
OK
OK
Storage System Status
OK
OK
OK
RAID Group Status
OK
OK
OK
Volume Status
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
REC Buffer Status (*1)
OK
OK
OK
Configuration Wizard
−
OK
OK
RAID Group
Management
Create RAID Group
−
OK
OK
Delete RAID Group
−
OK
OK
Assign Hot Spare
−
OK
OK
Release Hot Spare
−
OK
OK
Logical Device
Expansion
−
OK
OK
Set RAID Group Name
−
OK
OK
Set Eco-mode Schedule
−
OK
OK
Change CM Ownership
−
OK
OK
Modify RAID Group
Parameters
−
−
OK
Advanced Copy Status
Advanced Copy Path Status
Configuration
(*1)
21
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 2 Startup and Shutdown
2.5 Operation Screens
Chapter
Category
Configuration
Volume
Management
Advanced Copy
Management
User Role
Function
Monitor
Standard
Advanced
Create Volume
−
OK
OK
Delete Volume
−
OK
OK
Format Volume
−
OK
OK
Encrypt Volume
−
OK
OK
LUN Concatenation
−
OK
OK
RAID Migration
−
OK
OK
Initialize Snap Data
Volume
−
OK
OK
Modify Cache
Parameters
−
−
OK
Release Reservation
−
OK
OK
Set Volume Name
−
OK
OK
Configure LUN Mapping
−
OK
OK
Setup Snap Data Pool
−
OK
OK
Manage Copy Session
−
OK
OK
Register Copy License
−
OK
OK
Modify Copy Parameters
−
OK
OK
Modify EC/OPC Priority
−
OK
OK
−
OK
OK
−
OK
OK
Modify Port Mode (*1)
−
OK
OK
Modify REC Multiplicity
−
OK
OK
Modify REC Buffer (*1)
−
OK
OK
Setup User Account
−
OK
OK
Change User Password
−
OK
OK
Initialize User Account
−
OK
OK
Setup Network
Environment
−
OK
OK
Setup SNMP Agent
−
OK
OK
Download MIB File
−
OK
OK
Perform SNMP Trap
Test
−
OK
OK
Setup E-Mail Notification
−
OK
OK
Display SMTP Log
−
OK
OK
Renew SSL Certificate
−
OK
OK
Modify Copy Table Size
Set Copy Path
(*1)
(*1)
Global
Settings
User
Management
Network
Settings
22
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 2 Startup and Shutdown
2.5 Operation Screens
Chapter
Category
Global
Settings
Remote
Support
System
Settings
Host I/F
Management
Maintenance
User Role
Function
Monitor
Standard
Advanced
Display Support
Information
−
OK
OK
Display Communication
Log
−
OK
OK
Setup Remote Support
−
OK
OK
Update
Customer Information
−
OK
OK
Update Communication
Environment Information
−
OK
OK
Setup
Log Sending
Parameters
−
OK
OK
Stop/Restart Remote
Support
−
OK
OK
Download
Controller Firmware
−
−
OK
Setup Firmware Update
from Peer Storage
System
−
−
OK
Modify Date and Time
−
OK
OK
Modify Storage System
Name
−
OK
OK
Setup Encryption Mode
−
OK
OK
Change Box ID
−
OK
OK
Setup Power
Management
−
OK
OK
Setup Subsystem
Parameters
−
OK
OK
Setup Disk Patrol
−
−
OK
Setup SMI-S
Environment
−
−
OK
Setup Event Notification
−
OK
OK
Set Port Parameters
−
OK
OK
Setup Host
−
OK
OK
Setup Host Response
−
OK
OK
Modify Reset Group
−
OK
OK
−
−
OK
Start/End Maintenance
23
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 2 Startup and Shutdown
2.5 Operation Screens
Chapter
Category
Maintenance
Utilities
Monitor
Standard
Advanced
Hot Maintenance (*2)
−
−
−
Concurrent
Preventive Maintenance
−
−
OK
Force Disable
−
−
OK
Force Enable
−
−
OK
Add Drive Enclosure
−
OK
OK
Remove Drive
Enclosure
−
−
OK
Add Disk (*2)
−
−
−
Reduce Disk
−
−
OK
Add Controller Module
−
OK
OK
Apply Controller
Firmware
−
−
OK
Register Disk Firmware
−
−
OK
Apply Disk Firmware
−
−
OK
Delete Disk Firmware
−
−
OK
Clear Sense Data
−
−
OK
Display Event Log
OK
OK
OK
Export/Delete Log
−
OK
OK
Export Panic Dump
−
OK
OK
Start/Stop Performance Monitoring
−
OK
OK
Display Performance Information
OK
OK
OK
Display Error Information
−
OK
OK
Export Configuration
−
−
OK
Get G-List
−
−
OK
Shutdown/Restart Storage System
−
−
OK
Initialize System Disks
−
−
OK
Cache
Utilities
Manage Pinned Data
−
−
OK
Force Write Back
−
−
OK
Recovery
Utilities
Apply Configuration
−
−
OK
Backup Configuration
−
−
OK
Reset Backup/Restore
Fail
−
−
OK
Force Restore
−
−
OK
Reset Machine Down
Recovery Fail
−
−
OK
Reboot All CMs
−
−
OK
Change Master CM (*3)
−
−
OK
Perform Disk Diagnostic
−
−
OK
Perform RAID Group
Diagnostic
−
−
OK
Hardware
Maintenance
Firmware
Maintenance
Diagnosis
User Role
Function
Diagnostic
Utilities
OK: Available −: Not available
24
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 2 Startup and Shutdown
2.5 Operation Screens
*1:
*2:
*3:
Function displayed for ETERNUS DX90.
Function does not require any operation from GUI.
Function displayed when specifying Slave CM IP address for accessing the logon screen.
• Some functions are not displayed for some firmware versions and
device model names.
• "5.3.4 Encrypt Volume" (page 118) function will be available after using
the "6.4.3 Setup Encryption Mode" (page 238) function. However, when
the encryption function is not available, the "Setup Encryption Mode" is
not displayed in the menu.
25
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 3
Initial Setup
This chapter describes the Initial Setup menu. This menu supports the initial setup required
before starting operations.
● Set Date and Time
This screen is used to set the time/date and time zone (device location) of the internal clock.
● Set Storage System Name
This screen is used to set the name, administrator, and installation site of the ETERNUS
DX60/DX80/DX90 Disk storage system.
Information registered in this screen is used for the following functions and screens:
- Network management using SNMP
- Storage system name displayed in logon screen and operation screens
- Friendly Name (storage system name)(*1) for Virtual Disk Service (VDS)
*1:
VDS is a storage management function of the Windows Server®.
● Change Password
Change the password for the default account before starting operations.
● Modify Port Mode
This menu is available when using an ETERNUS DX90.
Change the port mode (Channel Adapter (CA) or Remote Adapter (RA)).
- CA
Used for connecting to the host.
- RA
Used for performing REC.
● Set Port Parameters
Set the connection information for ports.
There are three types of host interfaces; FC, iSCSI, and SAS. Procedures for setting port
parameters vary depending on the host interface types.
● Setup Network Environment
Set the environment for the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Disk storage system to
communicate on the network such as IP address and subnet mask.
26
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 3 Initial Setup
Note that the value specified in the Initial Setup menu can be changed subsequently. Refer to the
following sections for details.
Initial Setup
Refer to:
Set Date and Time
Refer
"6.4.1 Modify Date and Time" (page 235)
Set Storage System Name
Refer
"6.4.2 Modify Storage System Name" (page 237)
Change Password
Refer
"6.1.2 Change User Password" (page 195)
Modify Port Mode
Refer
"5.4.8 Modify Port Mode" (page 184)
Set Port Parameters
Refer
"6.5.1 Set Port Parameters" (page 254)
Setup Network Environment
Refer
"6.2.1 Setup Network Environment" (page 199)
Start the Initial Setup. The initial setup procedure is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Initial Setup] menu on the [Easy Setup] tab.
→ The Start screen of the [Initial Setup] function appears.
2
Click the [Next >] button.
→ Initial Setup starts. The "Set Date and Time" screen appears.
3
Set the following parameters, and click the [Next >] button.
• Date/Time Information
- Current Time
Current date and time setting is displayed.
- Date
To change the "Current Time", input the new date and time.
27
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 3 Initial Setup
• Time Zone
Set the time difference (GMT).
- Time Zone
Select the Time Zone from the list box. If the appropriate Time Zone does not exist,
select "Manually", and specify the time difference using "+" or "-", hour, and minute.
• Daylight Saving Time
- Set
Select whether to set the Daylight Saving Time "ON" or "OFF" with the radio button.
- Range
If "Set" is "ON", set the Daylight Saving Time period. Select "by day of the week" or
"by Date" with the radio button, and input the required parameters.
When selecting "by day of the week", "Last" can be selected to specify the start or end week.
When selecting "by Date", "Last Date" can be deleted to specify the
start or end date.
• NTP Service
- NTP server
Select "NTP enabled" or "NTP disabled" with the radio button. When NTP is
enabled, input the IP address or domain name for the NTP server in the text box.
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is synchronized with the NTP server in a step mode
fashion.
- LAN Port used for NTP
Select the LAN port to be used for NTP connection from "MNT" or "RMT".
- Access Status
Access state to the NTP server is displayed.
Click the [Skip >>] button to move on to the next screen without
setting.
→ A confirmation screen appears.
28
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 3 Initial Setup
4
Click the [OK] button.
→ The date and time setting is set, and the "Set Storage System Name" screen appears.
5
Set the following parameters, and click the [Next >] button.
• Name
Specify the storage system name. Between 1 and 16 alphanumeric characters,
symbols (except ', (comma)' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be
used.
• Installation Location
Specify the installation location of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. Between 1 and 50
alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ', (comma)' and '?', and '% used as the first
letter'), and blanks can be used.
• Administrator
Specify the system administrator name. Between 1 and 50 alphanumeric characters,
symbols (except ', (comma)' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be
used.
• Description
Specify the description of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. Between 1 and 50
alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ', (comma)' and '?', and '% used as the first
letter'), and blanks can be used.
• When setting the storage system name, all parameters in this
menu must be set.
• Once a parameter value is specified, the parameter cannot be
deleted (values can be changed).
→ A confirmation screen appears.
29
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 3 Initial Setup
6
Click the [OK] button.
→ The storage system name is set, and the "Change Password" screen appears.
7
Set the following parameters, and click the [Next >] button.
• User Name
The current (your) user account name is displayed.
• User Role
The current (your) user role is displayed.
• Old Password
Enter the current password.
• New Password
Enter the new password between 4 to 16 characters.
Alphanumeric characters and symbols ('! (exclamation mark)', '- (hyphen)', '_
(underscore)', and '. (period)') can be used.
• Confirm New Password
Enter the same character strings as the value entered in the "New Password" field for
confirmation.
When changing a user password, an error occurs in the following
conditions.
• When the "Old password" does not match the current password
• When the "Old password", "New Password", and/or "Confirm
New Password" is not entered
• When the password does not match the confirmation password
• When the password is less than 4, or more than 16 characters (If
17 or more characters are entered, ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90
ignores the 17th and later characters, and the password is registered using the first 16 characters only)
• When the password includes characters other than alphanumeric
characters and symbols ('! (exclamation mark)', '- (hyphen)', '_
(underscore)', and '. (period)')
30
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 3 Initial Setup
→ A confirmation screen appears.
8
Click the [OK] button.
→ The password is changed. For ETERNUS DX60/DX80, the "Set Port Parameters"
screen in Step 11 appears. For ETERNUS DX90, the "Modify Port Mode" screen in
Step 9 appears.
9
Specify the Port Mode (After) and click the [Next >] button.
→ A confirmation screen appears.
31
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 3 Initial Setup
10 Click the [OK] button.
→ The port mode is changed, and the "Set Port Parameters" screen appears.
11 Set the following parameters, and click the [Next >] button.
●Set FC Port Parameters
• When the port mode is "CA"
- Port
Select the target port.
- Port Mode
Port mode for the target port is displayed.
- Connection
Select the connection method for the target port from the "Fabric" or "FC-AL". When
"FC-AL" is selected, it is necessary to assign a Loop ID to the port.
- Set Loop ID
When the "Connection" is "FC-AL", select "Manual" or "Auto" to specify the Loop ID.
- Loop ID
When the "Set Loop ID" is "Manual", specify the Loop ID (last 2 digits of 0x00 to
0x7D).
When the "Set Loop ID" is "Auto", select "Ascending" or "Descending".
- Transfer Rate (Gbit/s)
Select the transfer speed of the target port from the following:
• For 4Gbit/s models
- Auto Negotiation
- 1
- 2
- 4
• For 8Gbit/s models
- Auto Negotiation
- 2
- 4
- 8
- Frame Size (bytes)
Select the frame size of the target port according to the destination server or switch
(2048, 1024, or 512).
- Host Affinity
Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the Host Affinity function for the target port.
Select "Enable" when restricting access to volumes for each server (when
connecting via switches).
Select "Disable" when restricting access to volumes for each port (when connecting
directly to the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90).
When connecting multiple servers and the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 directly
and restricting access to volumes for each server, enable the Host Affinity setting.
32
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 3 Initial Setup
- Host Response
When the "Host Affinity" is "Disabled", select the host response to allocate to the
target port.
• 0:Default
The initial pattern is displayed. Sense information is not converted.
• Host Response (Number:Name)
Identification number of the host response registered in the ETERNUS DX60/
DX80/DX90 is displayed.
When the host response name is registered, it is also displayed.
- Reset Scope
Select the reset scope from "I_T_L" or "T_L".
Reset scope is the range where the command reset request from the server is
performed, when the port is connected to multiple servers.
• I_T_L (I: Initiator, T: Target, L: LUN)
Reset (cancel) the command request from the server that sent the command
reset request.
• T_L (T: Target, L: LUN)
Reset (cancel) the command request from all servers that are connected to the
port (regardless of whether the LUN is recognized).
- Release Reservation if Chip is Reset
Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the function to release the volume's
reserved status when the target port (chip) is in Reset status.
33
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 3 Initial Setup
• When the port mode is "RA"
- Port
Select the target port.
- Port Mode
Port mode for the target port is displayed.
- Connection
Select the connection method for the target port from the "Fabric" or "FC-AL". When
"FC-AL" is selected, it is necessary to assign a Loop ID to the port.
- Set Loop ID
When the "Connection" is "FC-AL", select "Manual" or "Auto" to specify the Loop ID.
- Loop ID
When the "Set Loop ID" is "Manual", specify the Loop ID (last 2 digits of 0x00 to
0x7D).
When the "Set Loop ID" is "Auto", select "Ascending" or "Descending".
- Transfer Rate (Gbit/s)
Select the transfer speed of the target port from the following:
• Auto Negotiation
• 2
• 4
• 8
Clicking the [Copy] button displays the screen for selecting the copy
destination port. The port parameters are copied to the selected port.
Note that copy can be performed between ports that have the same
port mode.
●Set iSCSI Port Parameters
- Port
Select the target port.
- IP Address
Specify the IP address (0 to 255) for the target port (required).
34
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 3 Initial Setup
Click the [Test Connection (ping)] button to display the [Send ping
Command] screen. Specify the IP address of the connection
destination device whose connection status is to be checked and
number of execution, and click the [Send] button.
Sending the "ping" command enables you to check whether the
IP address is allocated correctly, and connection path to the
destination device is normal.
- Subnet Mask
Set the subnet mask (0 to 255) for the target port (required).
- Default Gateway
Set the default gateway for the target port.
- iSNS Server
Select wether to use the iSNS server in the target port.
When "Enable" is selected, specify the IP address (0 to 255) for the iSNS server.
Internet Storage Name Service (iSNS) is almost equivalent to
Domain Name System (DNS) for the Internet. iSNS server is
used to convert the iSCSI name to the IP address on the iSCSI
network.
- iSCSI Name
Set the iSCSI name for the target port. Between 4 and 223 alphanumeric characters
and symbols (’- (hyphen)’, ’: (colon)’, ’. (period)’) can be used. Click the [Default]
button to set the default iSCSI name.
An iSCSI name is a unique name in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80.
The same iSCSI name cannot be set to multiple iSCSI ports
except the device iSCSI name.
- Alias Name
Set the alias name for the target port. Between 1 and 31 alphanumeric characters
and symbols (including blanks) can be used.
While the iSCSI name is a formal nomenclature that specifies the target iSCSI port,
an alias name is used as nickname.
- Host Affinity
Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the Host Affinity function for the target port.
Select "Enable" when restricting access to volumes for each server (when
connecting via switches).
Select "Disable" when restricting access to volumes for each port (when connecting
directly to the ETERNUS DX60/DX80).
When connecting multiple servers and the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 directly and
restricting access to volumes for each server, enable the Host Affinity setting.
- Host Response
When the "Host Affinity" is "Disabled", select the host response to allocate to the
target port.
• 0:Default
The initial pattern is displayed. Sense information is not converted.
35
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 3 Initial Setup
• Host Response (Number:Name)
Identification number of the host response registered in the ETERNUS DX60/
DX80 is displayed.
When the host response name is registered, it is also displayed.
- Jumbo Frame
Select whether to enable or disable the Jumbo Frame.
Select "Enable" when using the Jumbo Frame to transfer data via the target port.
When not using the Jumbo Frame, select "Disable".
Enabling Jumbo Frame increases the amount of data to be transferred per Frame,
making data transfer more efficient.
Confirm that the connected device (*1) supports the Jumbo Frame before enabling
the Jumbo Frame.
*1:
When the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 and server are connected directly, this indicates that
the connected device is a server side LAN card (NIC). When the ETERNUS DX60/
DX80 and server are connected via a switch, this indicates that the connected device is
a switch.
- Transfer Rate
Select the transfer speed of the target port from the following:
• Auto Negotiation
• 100Mbit/s
• 1Gbit/s
Note that since the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 iSCSI port does
not support the Half-Duplex mode, the connected device (*1)
must be set as follows.
Transfer speed of the
ETERNUS DX60/DX80
*1:
Transfer speed of the
connected device (*1)
Auto Negotiation
Auto Negotiation
100Mbit/s
100Mbit/s (Full)
1Gbit/s
1Gbit/s
When the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 and server are connected
directly, this indicates that the connected device is a server side
LAN card (NIC). When the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 and server
are connected via a switch, this indicates that the connected
device is a switch.
- Reset Scope
Select the reset scope from "I_T_L" or "T_L".
Reset scope is the range where the command reset request from the server is
performed, when the port is connected to multiple servers.
• I_T_L (I: Initiator, T: Target, L: LUN)
Reset (cancel) the command request from the server that sent the command
reset request.
• T_L (T: Target, L: LUN)
Reset (cancel) the command request from all servers that are connected to the
port (regardless of whether the LUN is recognized).
- Release Reservation if Chip is Reset
Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the function to release the volume's
reserved status when the target port (chip) is in Reset status.
36
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 3 Initial Setup
- CHAP
Select "ON" when enabling CHAP authentication for the target port. To disable,
select "OFF".
For CHAP authentication, an encrypted password based on a random key that the
ETERNUS DX60/DX80 receives from the host is sent, and connection possibility is
judged on the server side.
- CHAP User Name
When "ON" is selected for "CHAP", specify the user name that accesses the target
port. Between 1 and 255 characters of alphanumeric characters and symbols
(including blanks) can be used.
This setting is required when CHAP authentication (Bidirectional CHAP) is used.
Make sure to set the user name and password in pairs.
- Change CHAP Password
When changing the CHAP password, select the checkbox. This checkbox can only
be selected when "ON" is selected for "CHAP" and the password has already been
set.
- Password
Specify the password for the currently specifying "Chap User Name".
- New Password
When "ON" is elected for "CHAP", specify the password that accesses the target
port.
Between 12 and 100 alphanumeric characters and symbols (including blanks) can
be used.
Make sure to set the user name and password in pairs.
- Confirm new Password
Input the same character strings as the value entered in the "New Password" field
for confirmation.
- Header Digest
Select "OFF" when not adding Header Digest of the target port. When adding,
select "CRC32C".
Header Digest is a check code to be added to the header part of the iSCSI port
detailed information.
Specify "CRC32C" when the host requests to add the check code. "CRC32C" is
algorithmic to create a check code.
- Data Digest
Select "OFF" when not adding Data Digest of the target port. When adding, select
"CRC32C".
Data Digest is a check code to be added to the data area of the iSCSI port detailed
information.
Specify "CRC32C" when the host requests to add the check code. "CRC32C" is
algorithmic to create a check code.
37
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 3 Initial Setup
• [Set iSCSI Port Parameters] screen (1/2)
• [Set iSCSI Port Parameters] screen (2/2)
38
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 3 Initial Setup
●Set SAS Port Parameters
- Port
Select the target port.
- Host Affinity
Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the Host Affinity function for the target port.
Select "Enable" when restricting access to volumes for each server.
Select "Disable" when restricting access to volumes for each port.
When connecting multiple servers and the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 directly and
restricting access to volumes for each server, enable the Host Affinity setting.
- Host Response
When the "Host Affinity" is "Disabled", select the host response to allocate to the
target port.
• 0:Default
The initial pattern is displayed. Sense information is not converted.
• Host Response (Number:Name)
Identification number of the host response registered in the ETERNUS DX60/
DX80 is displayed.
When the host response name is registered, it is also displayed.
- Reset Scope
Select the reset scope from "I_T_L" or "T_L".
Reset scope is the range where the command reset request from the server is
performed, when the port is connected to multiple servers.
• I_T_L (I: Initiator, T: Target, L: LUN)
Reset (cancel) the command request from the server that sent the command
reset request.
• T_L (T: Target, L: LUN)
Reset (cancel) the command request from all servers that are connected to the
port (regardless of whether the LUN is recognized).
- Release Reservation if Chip is Reset
Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the function to release the volume's
reserved status when the target port (chip) is in Reset status.
→ A confirmation screen appears.
39
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 3 Initial Setup
12 Click the [OK] button.
→ The port parameters are set, and the "Setup Network Environment" screen appears.
13 Set the following parameters, and click the [Next >] button.
• Select Network Port
Select the port to be used from the "MNT" or "RMT".
• Interface
- Speed and Duplex
Select the communication speed and mode from the following.
• Auto Negotiation
• 1Gbit/s
• 100Mbit/s Half
• 100Mbit/s Full
• 10Mbit/s Half
• 10Mbit/s Full
- Master CM IP Address
Enter the IP address (0 to 255) for the Master CM in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/
DX90 Disk storage system.
- Slave CM IP Address
Enter the IP address (0 to 255) for the Slave CM in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/
DX90 Disk storage system. This setting is required to duplicate LAN path.
When the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 has only one CM, a
Slave IP address cannot be specified.
- Subnet Mask
Set the subnet mask (0 to 255) for the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Disk storage
system.
- Default Gateway
Set the default gateway address (0 to 255) for the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90
Disk storage system.
- Primary DNS
Set the IP address for the Primary DNS server (0 to 255) for the ETERNUS DX60/
DX80/DX90 Disk storage system.
- Secondary DNS
Set the IP address for the Secondary DNS server (0 to 255) for the ETERNUS
DX60/DX80/DX90 Disk storage system.
- http
Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the http connection.
This connection is used when accessing from GUI.
- https
Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the https connection.
This connection is used when accessing from GUI.
40
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 3 Initial Setup
- telnet
Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the telnet connection.
This connection is used when accessing from CLI.
- SSH
Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the SSH connection.
This connection is used when accessing from CLI.
- Maintenance
Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the Maintenance connection.
This connection is used when accessing from the monitoring software.
- Maintenance-Secure
Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the Maintenance-Secure connection.
This connection is used when accessing from the monitoring software. This
connection uses the data encryption for data transferring.
- ICMP
Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the ICMP connection.
This connection is used when transferring ping command from PC.
• Allowed IP List
The value entered in this field is enabled when the default gateway has been set.
Set the destination network address (IP address and subnet mask).
Up to 16 addresses can be set. Make sure to set the IP address and subnet mask in
pairs.
• Note the following when specifying the IP address and subnet
mask.
- Specify the IP address using IPv4 notation (character string in
d.d.d.d format based on the 256 radix system).
- RMT port is used when it is required to use the dedicated
network for Remote Support. IP addresses for the RMT port
and MNT port must be in different subnets.
- "Slave CM IP Address" is specified when connecting to the
Slave CM. IP addresses for the Slave CM and Master CM
must be in the same subnet.
- Specify the IP address of "Default Gateway" when allowing
access from outside of the subnetwork. The IP address must
be in the same subnetwork as the port.
- For "Allowed IP List", specify the IP address or network
address of an ETERNUS DX Disk storage system to allow the
ETERNUS DX Disk storage system to connect to the
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. These settings are not required
when connecting the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system that
belongs to the same network address (same sub-network) as
the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90.
• Access to the device will not be allowed if all protocol ports are
disabled. When access to the device is not allowed, refer to
"ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Disk storage systems User Guide"
to reset the settings.
41
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 3 Initial Setup
For the two CMs in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90, the CM that
has the priority to manage the device is called the Master CM, and
the other is called the Slave CM. If a CM or LAN failure occurs,
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 changes the Master CM automatically.
The IP address for prior Master CM is taken over to the new Master
CM. Specifying an IP address for the Slave CM enables forcible
changing of the Master CM. When an error occurs and access to the
Master CM is disabled, users can access the Slave CM and change
the Master CM.
→ A confirmation screen appears.
14 Click the [OK] button.
→ The Network Environment is set, and the "Finish" screen appears.
42
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 3 Initial Setup
15 Click the [Finish] button.
→ The [Initial Setup] completes.
Device setting operation cannot be continued if the IP address is
changed. Logon again with the new IP address is required.
End of procedure
43
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 4
Status Menu
This chapter describes the following status display menu.
• Storage System Status
• RAID Group Status
• Volume Status
• Advanced Copy Status
• Advanced Copy Path Status
• REC Buffer Status
4.1
Storage System Status
This function is used to check the status of components configuring the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/
DX90.
Status of each component in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is monitored periodically, and the
result is displayed as a general status image with character strings.
● General Status
The general status of ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is displayed as an image with character
strings in the Global Header.
The general status is determined by each component status.
A "Normal (green)" general status image indicates normal status, while other color images
indicate a failure.
The following table shows an each status images.
Image
Description
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is in normal state.
(Green)
(Red)
"Not Ready" is a status where an abnormality is detected at a
power-off, and I/O access from the host cannot be received.
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is in error state.
(Red)
44
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 4 Status Menu
4.1 Storage System Status
Image
Description
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is under maintenance.
(Orange)
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is in warning state.
(Yellow)
(Gray)
The component is installed in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90,
but not used.
● General status image display priority
A general status image is determined by integrated status of components such as Controller
Enclosure, Drive Enclosure, and cables, which configures the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90.
The following shows the general status display priority.
High ←
(Red: Not Ready) −
maintenance work) −
(Red: Error) −
(Yellow: Warning) −
(Orange: During
(Green: Normal) −
(Gray: Installed, but not used) → Low
When the general status is changed, check the component status. Expand the device tree in the
[Storage System Status] menu on the [Status] tab, and select the target component.
● Component Status
Status of each component is displayed as a status symbol in the device tree of [Storage
System Status] menu on the [Status] tab.
The following table shows the component status symbols.
Symbol
(Green)
(Red)
(Yellow)
(Orange)
(Blue)
(Gray)
Description
The component is in normal status.
An error occurs in the component.
The component requires the preventive maintenance.
The component is under maintenance.
The component is installed, but not used.
(Caution)
If a disk is in this state, "Normal (green)" is displayed instead of "Warning
(yellow)" as a general status.
Status other than described above is detected in the component.
45
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 4 Status Menu
4.1 Storage System Status
● Component list
The following table shows the each component name in the device tree displayed on the left
of the [Storage System Status] menu.
Component name
Description
Remarks
Enclosure
(Storage system name
registered in the "Chapter 3
Initial Setup" (page 26) or
"6.4.2 Modify Storage
System Name" (page 237))
Storage system name
−
Controller Enclosure
Controller enclosure
−
Drive Enclosure
Drive enclosure
−
Controller Module
Controller module
Displayed under the "Controller
Enclosure".
Expander
Expander
Displayed under the "Drive
Enclosure".
Port
Host port
Displayed under the "Controller
Module".
Power Supply Unit
PSU (Power Supply Unit)
Disks
All disks in the device
Displayed under the "Controller
Enclosure" and "Drive
Enclosure".
Disk
Each disk in the controller
enclosure or drive enclosure
Displayed under the "Disks".
SAS Cable
SAS cable
−
The procedure to display the storage system status is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Storage System Status] menu on the [Status] tab.
→ The [Storage System Status] screen appears.
The device tree in the left of the screen displays the components that configure the
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90.
46
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 4 Status Menu
4.1 Storage System Status
• Clicking the [Manual Refresh] or [Auto-refresh] button changes
the status refresh mode.
- [Manual Refresh] button
The displayed information is not updated automatically (Manual Refresh mode). Click the [Refresh] button to display the
latest information.
- [Auto-refresh] button (Default)
The displayed information is automatically updated every one
minute (Auto-refresh mode).
• Clicking the [Refresh] button updates and displays the latest
information.
2
Click the component icon to display the status.
→ Detailed information of the selected component is displayed on the right of the screen.
47
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 4 Status Menu
4.1 Storage System Status
For details about displayed information, refer to the following sections.
When clicking the [Turn on locator beacon] button, "IDENTIFY LED"
on the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 front cover blinks blue or turns
off. This button is used to identify the target controller or drive enclosure.
End of procedure
4.1.1
Storage System
Detailed information of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is displayed.
● Enclosure Status Display
The following contents are displayed for the enclosure status display.
Display contents
Description
Enclosure View
Name
Storage system name ("Friendly Name" for the VDS (*1))
Refer to "6.4.2 Modify Storage System Name" (page 237) for detailed
procedure to register the storage system name.
Model Name
Model name (product ID) of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90
Serial Number
Serial number of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90
Device Identification
Number
The device identification number is displayed.
Status
General status of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90
Cache Mode
Operational state of the cache (factor of "Write Through" state)
(Write Back Mode / Write Through Mode (Pinned Data / Battery /
Maintenance))
Remote Support
Status of the remote support
(Operating / Stopping / Maintenance / Not Configured)
Operation Mode
Operational state of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90
(Active / Maintenance)
Controller Module
connected to the GUI
Controller module that can be controlled via GUI
Firmware Version
Current controller firmware version
Controller Enclosure
Status of the controller enclosure
Drive Enclosure
Status of the drive enclosure
System Message
*1:
No.
Number of the system message
Message
Details of the system message
Virtual Disk Service (VDS) is a storage management function of the Windows Server®.
48
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 4 Status Menu
4.1 Storage System Status
4.1.2
Controller Enclosure
This screen shows the status of controller enclosure and its components.
● Controller Enclosure Status Display
The following contents are displayed for the Controller Enclosure status display.
Display contents
Description
Controller Enclosure Display
Front View
Installation diagram for the front of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90
Rear View
Installation diagram for the rear of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90
Information
CE information
Serial Number
The unique number of the controller enclosure is displayed. The
displayed contents vary depending on the location of the ETERNUS
DX60/DX80/DX90.
Other Information
The unique number of the controller enclosure is displayed. The displayed contents vary depending on the location of the ETERNUS DX60/
DX80/DX90.
Intake Temp
External temperature status of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90
(Normal / Error / Warning)
Exhaust Temp
Internal temperature status of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90
(Normal / Error / Warning)
Front View
Status, Capacity, Speed (rpm), Type, Usage, and RAID group of each component (disk)
Rear View
Status and Expanded Information of each component (CM and PSU) are displayed
● Controller Module Status Display
The following contents are displayed for the Controller Module status display.
Display contents
Description
CM Display
Rear View
Installation diagram for the rear of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90
CM Information
CM Information
Location
Number of the controller module
Status
Status of the controller module
(Normal / Maintenance / Error / Check1 / Undefined / Unconnected /
Unmounted / Warning)
Status Code
Status code of the controller module
Error Code
Error factor of the controller module
Memory Size (GB)
Cache memory capacity of the controller module (GB)
Type
Type of the host port installed in the controller module (Fibre Channel
(FC) model / iSCSI model / SAS model)
WWN (for FC model
or SAS model)
WWN of the controller module
49
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 4 Status Menu
4.1 Storage System Status
Display contents
Description
Part Number
Component number of the controller module
Serial Number
Serial number of the controller module
Hardware Revision
Hardware revision of the controller module
CPU Clock
(MHz/GHz)
Clock frequency of the CPU in the controller module
Active EC
Edition Control (EC) number of the currently running firmware
Next EC
EC number of the firmware that is to be run after the next power-on
CM Internal Parts Information
Status, Error Code, and Note for the following Parts (components) are displayed.
- [for FC model / iSCSI model / SAS model]
• Memory
• BE Expander
• BE EXP Port
• DI Port
• SCU
• NAND Controller
• Flash ROM
- [for FC model only]
• SAS Cable
• FC Port
- [for iSCSI model only]
• SAS Cable
• iSCSI Port
- [for SAS model only]
• SAS Port
• FE Expander
● Port Status Display (for FC model)
The following contents are displayed for the FC port status display.
Display contents
Description
CM Display
Rear View
Installation diagram for the rear of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90
CM Port Information
Location
Number of the port
Port Mode (*1)
Mode of the port
(CA / RA)
Status
Status of the port
(Normal / Maintenance / Error / Undefined)
Status Code
Status code of the port
Error Code
Error factor of the port
Type
FC port type
Connection
Connection method to the host
(Loop / Fabric)
50
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 4 Status Menu
4.1 Storage System Status
Display contents
*1:
Description
Loop ID
Allocated ID when the fixed Loop ID is used
(0x00 − 0x7D)
Transfer Rate
Port transfer rate
(For 4Gbit/s model: 4Gbit/s / 2Gbit/s / 1Gbit/s / Auto Negotiation)
(For 8Gbit/s model: 8Gbit/s / 4Gbit/s / 2Gbit/s / Auto Negotiation)
Link Status
Link status
(For 4Gbit/s model: 4Gbit/s Link Up / 2Gbit/s Link Up /
1Gbit/s Link Up / Link Down)
(For 8Gbit/s model: 8Gbit/s Link Up / 4Gbit/s Link Up /
2Gbit/s Link Up / Link Down)
WWN
WWN of the port
Host Affinity
Current Host Affinity function setting (enabled or disabled)
Host Response
Host response allocated to the port when the Host Affinity function is not
used
Part Number
Component number of the port
Serial Number
Serial number of the port
Hardware Revision
Hardware revision of the port
This item is displayed for ETERNUS DX90.
● Port Status Display (for iSCSI model)
The following contents are displayed for the iSCSI port status display.
Display contents
Description
CM Display
Rear View
Installation diagram for the rear of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80
CM Port Information
Location
Number of the port
Status
Status of the port
(Normal / Maintenance / Error / Undefined)
Status Code
Status code of the port
Error Code
Error factor of the port
Type
iSCSI port type
Transfer Rate
Port transfer rate (1Gbit/s / 100Mbit/s / Auto Negotiation)
Link Status
Link status
(1Gbit/s Link Up / 100Mbit/s Link Up / Link Down)
iSCSI Name
iSCSI name of the port
iSCSI Alias Name
iSCSI alias name of the port
Host Affinity
Current Host Affinity function setting (enabled or disabled)
Host Response
Host response allocated to the port when the Host Affinity function is not
used
51
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 4 Status Menu
4.1 Storage System Status
● Port Status Display (for SAS model)
The following contents are displayed for the SAS port status display.
Display contents
Description
CM Display
Rear View
Installation diagram for the rear of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80
CM Port Information
Location
Number of the port
Status
Status of the port
(Normal / Maintenance / Error / Undefined)
Status Code
Status code of the port
Error Code
Error factor of the port
Type
SAS port type
Transfer Rate
Port transfer rate (3Gbit/s)
Link Status
Link status
(Phy#0: 3.0Gbit/s Link Up / 1.5Gbit/s Link Up / Link Down)
(Phy#1: 3.0Gbit/s Link Up / 1.5Gbit/s Link Up / Link Down)
(Phy#2: 3.0Gbit/s Link Up / 1.5Gbit/s Link Up / Link Down)
(Phy#3: 3.0Gbit/s Link Up / 1.5Gbit/s Link Up / Link Down)
SAS Address
SAS Address of the port
Host Affinity
Current Host Affinity function setting (enabled or disabled)
Host Response
Host response allocated to the port when the Host Affinity function is not
used.
● SAS Cable Status Display
The following contents are displayed for the SAS cable status display.
Display contents
Description
Controller Enclosure Display
Rear View
Installation diagram for the rear of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80
CM SAS Cable Information
Status
Status of the SAS cable
(Normal / Error / Maintenance / Warning)
Status Code
Status code of the SAS cable
Error Code
Error factor of the SAS cable
● Power Supply Unit Status Display
The following contents are displayed for the Power Supply Unit (PSU) status display.
Display contents
Description
CE PSU Display
Rear View
Installation diagram for the rear of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90
CE PSU Information
Location
Number of the power supply unit
Status
Status of the power supply unit
(Normal / Error / Maintenance)
Status Code
Status code of the power supply unit
Error Code
Error factor of the power supply unit
52
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 4 Status Menu
4.1 Storage System Status
Display contents
Description
Part Number
Component number of the power supply unit
Serial Number
Serial number of the power supply unit
Hardware Revision
Hardware revision of the power supply unit
● Disks Status Display
The following contents are displayed for the Disks status display.
Display contents
Description
Controller Enclosure Display
Front View
Installation diagram for the front of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90
Information
Front View
Status, Capacity, Speed (rpm), Type, Usage, and RAID group for each component (disk) are
displayed
● Disk Status Display
The following contents are displayed for the Disk status display.
Display contents
Description
Controller Enclosure Disk Display
Front View
Installation diagram for the front of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90
Information
Location
Disk slot number
Status
Status of the disk
(Unknown / Available / Broken / Not Available / Not Supported / Present
/ Readying / Rebuild / Copyback / Failed Usable / Spare / Formatting /
Not Format / Not Exist / Redundant Copy)
Status Code
Status code of the disk
Error Code
Error factor of the disk
Capacity
Disk capacity (GB / TB)
Type
Disk size (2.5" / 3.5") and type (SAS / SSD)
Speed (rpm)
Speed of the disk
Usage
Usage of the disk
(Data / System / Spare / −)
RAID Group
RAID group where disks are registered
Motor Status
Status of the disk motor
(Active / In the Boot Process / Idle / In the Stop Process)
Rebuild/Copyback
Progress
Rebuild/Copyback progress (%)
Vender ID
Vendor ID of the disk
Product ID
Product name of the disk
Serial Number
Serial number of the disk
WWN
WWN for the disk
Firmware Revision
Disk firmware version
53
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 4 Status Menu
4.1 Storage System Status
4.1.3
Drive Enclosure
This screen shows the status of drive enclosure and its components.
● Drive Enclosure Status Display
The following contents are displayed for the Drive Enclosure status display.
Display contents
Description
Drive Enclosure Display
Front View
Installation diagram for the front of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90
Rear View
Installation diagram for the rear of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90
Information
DE Information
Serial Number
The unique number of the drive enclosure is displayed. The displayed
contents vary depending on the location of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/
DX90.
Other Information
The unique number of the drive enclosure is displayed. The displayed
contents vary depending on the location of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/
DX90.
Intake Temp
External temperature status of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90
(Normal / Error / Warning)
Exhaust Temp
Internal temperature status of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90
(Normal / Error / Warning)
Front View
Status, Capacity, Speed (rpm), Type, Usage, and RAID group of each component (disk)
Rear View
Status and Expanded Information of each component (EXP and PSU) are displayed
● Expander Status Display
The following contents are displayed for the Expander status display.
Display contents
Description
Drive Enclosure Display
Rear View
Installation diagram for the rear of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90
DE EXP Information
DE EXP Information
Status
Status of the expander
(Normal / Maintenance / Error / Undefined / Warning)
Status Code
Status code of the expander
Error Code
Error factor of the expander
WWN
WWN of the expander
Part Number
Component number of the expander
Serial Number
Serial number of the expander
Hardware Revision
Hardware revision of the expander
Active EC
EC number of the currently running firmware
Next EC
EC number of the firmware that is to be run after the next power-on
54
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 4 Status Menu
4.1 Storage System Status
Display contents
Description
DE EXP Internal Parts Information
Status and error code of each component (SAS Cable) are displayed
● SAS Cable Status Display
The following contents are displayed for the SAS cable status display.
Display contents
Description
Drive Enclosure Display
Rear View
Installation diagram for the rear of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80
DE EXP SAS Cable Information
Status
Status of the SAS cable
(Normal / Error / Maintenance / Warning)
Status Code
Status code of the SAS cable
Error Code
Error factor of the SAS cable
● Power Supply Unit Status Display
The following contents are displayed for the Power Supply Unit (PSU) status display.
Display contents
Description
DE PSU Display
Rear View
Installation diagram for the rear of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90
DE PSU Information
Location
Number of the power supply unit
Status
Status of the power supply unit
(Normal / Error / Maintenance)
Status Code
Status code of the power supply unit
Error Code
Error factor of the power supply unit
Part Number
Component number of the power supply unit
Serial Number
Serial number of the power supply unit
Hardware Revision
Hardware revision of the power supply unit
● Disks Status Display
The following contents are displayed for the Disks status display.
Display contents
Description
Drive Enclosure Display
Front View
Installation diagram for the front of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90
Information
Front View
Status, Capacity, Speed (rpm), Type, Usage, and RAID group for each component (disk) are
displayed
55
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 4 Status Menu
4.1 Storage System Status
● Disk Status Display
The following contents are displayed for the Disk status display.
Display contents
Description
Drive Enclosure Disk Display
Front View
Installation diagram for the front of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90
information
Location
Disk slot number
Status
Status of the disk
(Unknown / Available / Broken / Not Available / Not Supported / Present
/ Readying / Rebuild/Copyback / Failed Usable / Spare / Formatting /
Not Format / Not Exist / Redundant Copy)
Status Code
Status code of the disk
Error Code
Error factor of the disk
Capacity
Disk capacity (GB / TB)
Type
Disk size (2.5" / 3.5") and type (SAS / SSD)
Speed (rpm)
Speed of the disk
Usage
Usage of the disk (Data / System / Spare / −)
RAID Group
RAID group where disks are registered
Motor Status
Status of the disk motor
(Active / In the Boot Process / Idle / In the Stop Process)
Rebuild/Copyback
Progress
Rebuild/Copyback progress (%)
Vender ID
Vendor ID of the disk
Product ID
Product name of the disk
Serial Number
Serial number of the disk
WWN
WWN for the disk
Firmware Revision
Disk firmware version
56
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 4 Status Menu
4.2 RAID Group Status
4.2
RAID Group Status
The [RAID Group Status] displays the status of RAID groups registered in the ETERNUS DX60/
DX80/DX90.
The procedure to display the RAID group status is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [RAID Group Status] menu on the [Status] tab.
→ The [RAID Group Status] screen appears.
The tree and list of the registered RAID groups are displayed.
2
Click the target RAID group icon in the tree or link in the "RAID Group List" to
display detailed information.
• Clicking the [Manual Refresh] or [Auto-refresh] button changes
the status refresh mode.
- [Manual Refresh] button
The displayed information is not updated automatically (Manual Refresh mode). Click the [Refresh] button to display the
latest information.
- [Auto-refresh] button (Default)
The displayed information is automatically updated every one
minute (Auto-refresh mode).
• Clicking the [Refresh] button updates and displays the latest
information.
57
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 4 Status Menu
4.2 RAID Group Status
→ The detailed information of the RAID group is displayed.
End of procedure
58
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 4 Status Menu
4.3 Volume Status
4.3
Volume Status
The [Volume Status] displays the status of volumes registered in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/
DX90.
The procedure to display the volume status is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Volume Status] menu on the [Status] tab.
→ The [Volume Status] screen appears.
The tree and list of the registered volumes are displayed.
2
Click the target volume icon in the tree or link in the "Volume List" to display
detailed information.
• Clicking the [Manual Refresh] or [Auto-refresh] button changes
the status refresh mode.
- [Manual Refresh] button
The displayed information is not updated automatically (Manual Refresh mode). Click the [Refresh] button to display the
latest information.
- [Auto-refresh] button (Default)
The displayed information is automatically updated every one
minute (Auto-refresh mode).
• Clicking the [Refresh] button updates and displays the latest
information.
59
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 4 Status Menu
4.3 Volume Status
→ Detailed information of the volume is displayed.
The volume number and the location of the volume in the RAID
group may be different.
End of procedure
60
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 4 Status Menu
4.4 Advanced Copy Status
4.4
Advanced Copy Status
The [Advanced Copy Status] displays the Advanced Copy related status.
Refer to "5.4 Advanced Copy Management" (page 139) for details about Advanced Copy.
The procedure to display the Advanced Copy status is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Advanced Copy Status] menu on the [Status] tab.
→ The [Advanced Copy Status] screen appears.
Current Advanced Copy status and list of sessions are displayed.
61
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 4 Status Menu
4.4 Advanced Copy Status
• Content that is displayed in the "Advanced Copy Property" and
"List of Advanced Copy Sessions" fields vary depending on the
session type that is selected.
• The SnapOPC+ session type varies depending on the client information.
- SnapOPC+ (by Host, all)
A SnapOPC+ session that is created from the host (in which
software such as Windows Volume Shadow Copy Service
(VSS) and ETERNUS SF AdvancedCopy Manager (ACM) is
installed).
"VSS / ACS" is displayed as the client information.
- Snap OPC+ (by LAN, oldest)
A first generation SnapOPC+ session that is created from GUI
or CLI.
"GUI / CLI" is displayed as the client information.
- SnapOPC+ (by LAN, all)
A SnapOPC+ session that is created from GUI or CLI.
"GUI / CLI" is displayed as the client information.
End of procedure
62
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 4 Status Menu
4.5 Advanced Copy Path Status
4.5
Advanced Copy Path Status
The [Advanced Copy Path Status] displays the status of the copy path between local and remote
devices created for Advanced Copy (REC).
Refer to "5.4.7 Set Copy Path" (page 164) for detailed procedures on creating the copy path.
The [Advanced Copy Path Status] menu is available when using an
ETERNUS DX90 device.
The procedure for displaying the Advanced Copy Path status is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Advanced Copy Path Status] menu on the [Status] tab.
→ The [Advanced Copy Path Status] screen appears.
Box IDs for the local and remote devices are displayed.
• Clicking the [Manual Refresh] or [Auto-refresh] button changes
the status refresh mode.
- [Manual Refresh] button
The displayed information is not updated automatically (Manual Refresh mode). Click the [Refresh] button to display the
latest information.
- [Auto-refresh] button (Default)
The displayed information is automatically updated every one
minute (Auto-refresh mode).
• Clicking the [Refresh] button updates and displays the latest
information.
63
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 4 Status Menu
4.5 Advanced Copy Path Status
2
Select the desired remote device (Box ID) to check the status of the copy path
between it and the local device.
→ The current Advanced copy path status is displayed.
End of procedure
64
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 4 Status Menu
4.6 REC Buffer Status
4.6
REC Buffer Status
The [REC Buffer Status] function displays the REC buffer status.
Refer to "5.4.10 Modify REC Buffer" (page 188) for detailed information about the REC buffer.
The [REC Buffer Status] menu is available when using an ETERNUS DX90
device.
The procedure for displaying the REC buffer status is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [REC Buffer Status] menu on the [Status] tab.
→ The [REC Buffer Status] screen appears.
A list of REC buffer statuses is displayed.
• Clicking the [Manual Refresh] or [Auto-refresh] button changes
the status refresh mode.
- [Manual Refresh] button
The displayed information is not updated automatically (Manual Refresh mode). Click the [Refresh] button to display the
latest information.
- [Auto-refresh] button (Default)
The displayed information is automatically updated every one
minute (Auto-refresh mode).
• Clicking the [Refresh] button updates and displays the latest
information.
End of procedure
65
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5
Configuration
This chapter describes the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 configuration related menu.
The following menus are provided:
• Configuration Wizard
• RAID Group Management
• Volume Management
• Advanced Copy Management
5.1
Configuration Wizard
The [Configuration Wizard] function provides series of settings required for ETERNUS DX60/
DX80/DX90 operation on the wizard screen.
This function provides configurations in the following order: Create RAID Group, Create Volume,
Define Host, Configure Affinity Group, and Define LUN Mapping.
Also, adding volumes and changing settings for existing RAID groups are available.
• The value specified in each screen is immediately reflected to the
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. Even if the operation is canceled in the
middle of it, the specified contents cannot be canceled.
• Perform "6.5.1 Set Port Parameters" (page 254) before starting the
Configuration Wizard. When using the Host Affinity functions, make sure
to "Enable" the Host Affinity setting of the port.
Refer to "6.5 Host I/F Management" (page 252) for details about the
host affinity
● Create RAID Group
Create a RAID group (group of disks configuring RAID in the device) on this screen.
● Create Volume
Create volumes (disk area in the RAID group) on this screen. The server recognizes the
volume as units of RAID configuration.
● Define Host
Register the server information to be connected to the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 via a
port.
Define host setting is not needed when the Host Affinity function is not used.
66
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.1 Configuration Wizard
● Configure Affinity Group
Creates the group of volumes to be recognized from the server (affinity group).
Associate a server recognized Logical Unit Number (LUN) and volume numbers.
The server recognizes the affinity group using the Host Affinity setting that allocates the
affinity group to the server.
Configure Affinity Group setting is not needed when the host affinity function is not used.
● Define LUN Mapping
Specify the volume to be recognized from the server.
- When the host affinity function is used
Allocate the affinity group for each server connected to the port (Host Affinity setting).
- When the host affinity function is not used
Allocate the volume number managed in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 and server
recognized LUN for each port (LUN mapping setting).
Note that the value specified in the Configuration Wizard menu can be changed subsequently.
Refer to the following sections for details.
Configuration Wizard
Refer to
Create RAID Group
Refer
"5.2.1 Create RAID Group" (page 88)
Create Volume
Refer
"5.3.1 Create Volume" (page 111)
Define Host
Refer
"6.5.2 Setup Host" (page 263)
Refer
"5.3.10 Configure LUN Mapping" (page 131)
Configure Affinity Group
Define LUN Mapping
The following shows the procedure of configuration wizard:
Procedure
1
Click the [Configuration Wizard] menu on the [Easy Setup] tab.
→ The [Configuration Wizard] menu appears.
67
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.1 Configuration Wizard
2
Click the [Start] button.
→ The Configuration Wizard starts. The [Create RAID Group] screen appears.
3
Set the following items, and click the [Next >] button.
Select the RAID group creating method from the following:
• Create RAID Group (Disks are assigned automatically)
Creates a RAID group with an automatically selected disk.
• Create RAID Group (Disks are selected manually)
Creates a RAID group with a user specified disk.
• Select existing RAID Group
Creates volumes in an existing RAID group of ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90.
When this item is selected, the "Select Target RAID Group" field is displayed. Select
the RAID group to create volumes. Note that Step 4 and Step 5 in the following
procedure are skipped when this method is used.
- Create RAID Group (Disks are assigned automatically)
68
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.1 Configuration Wizard
- Create RAID Group (Disks are selected manually)
- Select existing RAID Group
→ When "Create RAID Group (Disks are assigned automatically)" or "Create RAID Group
(Disks are selected manually)" is selected: Move on to Step 4.
When "Select existing RAID Group" is selected: Move on to Step 6.
69
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.1 Configuration Wizard
4
Specify the following items, and click the [Create] button.
• RAID Group Name
Enter the RAID group name to be created.
Between 1 and 16 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ', (comma)' and '?', and
'% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be used (required).
• RAID Level
Select the RAID level.
Only RAID levels that are configurable per the currently installed disks are displayed.
Specifying disks manually narrows down the selectable RAID level options.
• Disk Capacity
When selecting "Create RAID Group (Disks are assigned automatically)" in Step 3,
select the disk capacity and number of disks to be used in the RAID group.
Capacity is displayed only for disks that are actually installed and can configure the
selected RAID group.
The available number of disks varies depending on the specified RAID level.
- RAID0: 2 − 16
- RAID1: 2
- RAID1+0: 4 − 32 (even number)
- RAID5: 3 − 16
- RAID6: 5 − 16
- RAID5+0: 6 − 32 (even number)
• Assigned CM
Select the assigned CM for the RAID group from "Automatic", "CM#0", or "CM#1".
Normally, select the "Automatic". When the "Automatic" is selected, the control CM to
be assigned varies according to the RAID group number. If the RAID group number is
an even number, CM#0 is assigned to the new RAID group. For an odd number RAID
group, CM#1 is assigned to the new RAID group.
When the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 has only one CM, CM#1
cannot be specified as the Assigned CM.
• Select Disk
When "Create RAID Group (Disks are selected manually)" is selected in Step 3, select
the disks to be registered in the RAID Group (required).
• A RAID group name that is already registered in the ETERNUS
DX60/DX80/DX90 cannot be specified.
• It is not possible to select more than, or less than, the specified
number of configuration disks for each RAID level.
• RAID0 has no data redundancy. RAID1, RAID1+0, RAID5,
RAID6, and RAID5+0 are recommended for the RAID level.
• If disks of different capacities exist in a RAID group, the smallest
capacity becomes the standard, and all other disks are regarded
as having the same capacity as the smallest disk. In this case, the
remaining disk space will NOT be used.
• SSD and SAS disks (SAS or Nearline SAS) cannot exist together
in a single RAID group.
70
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.1 Configuration Wizard
- Create RAID Group (Disks are assigned automatically)
- Create RAID Group (Disks are selected manually)
→ A confirmation screen appears.
71
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.1 Configuration Wizard
5
Click the [OK] button.
→ A RAID Group is created. Move on to the [Create Volume] screen.
Refer to "5.2.5 Logical Device Expansion" (page 98) or "5.2.8
Change CM Ownership" (page 109) to change the setting items after
creating the RAID group.
6
Specify the following items, and click the [Create] button.
• Volume Name
Enter the volume name to be created.
Between 1 and 16 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ', (comma)' and '?', and
'% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be used (required).
• Type
Select the volume type (Open or SDV).
• Size (MB)
Specify the volume capacity to be created in units of MB.
Set the value between 24 to 8388607 (MB), or maximum capacity of the RAID group.
When creating an SDV, the total SDV capacity (MB) and 0.1% of
the copy source volume capacity is secured in the ETERNUS
DX60/DX80/DX90. 0.1% of the copy source volume is the
capacity used for the controlling information area in the SDV.
• Source Volume Size (MB) (SDV only)
When SDV is selected for "Type", specify the total capacity of the copy source volume
in units of MB.
Set the value between 64 to 8388607 (MB).
• Encryption
This item is displayed only when encryption mode is enabled.
Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" encryption mode for the new volume.
An encrypted volume cannot be changed to a non-encrypted volume.
Refer to "6.4.3 Setup Encryption Mode" (page 238) and "5.3.4 Encrypt Volume" (page
118) for details.
• Number of Volumes
When creating multiple volumes with the same type and capacity, enter the number of
volumes to be created.
Created volume name is "specified volume name + running number starting from 0".
72
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.1 Configuration Wizard
→ A confirmation screen appears.
7
Click the [OK] button.
→ Volumes are created. Move on to the [Define Host] screen.
8
Click the [Add] button.
Define host setting is required when the host affinity function is used.
73
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.1 Configuration Wizard
- For FC host
→ The "Add New FC Host" field is displayed.
- For iSCSI host
→ The "Add New iSCSI Host" field is displayed.
74
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.1 Configuration Wizard
- For SAS host
→ The "Add New SAS Host" field is displayed.
9
Specify the following items, and click the [Add] button.
- For FC host
• FC Port
A list of FC ports that exist in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is displayed.
When a fibre channel switch is connected to the ETERNUS
DX60/DX80/DX90, settings between the fibre channel switch and
server (FC host) must be completed in advance.
For ETERNUS DX90, only ports where the port mode is "CA" are
displayed. Refer to "5.4.8 Modify Port Mode" (page 184) for
detailed information about port modes.
• WWN
Select the WWN, or directly input a WWN (required). 16 capital letters and numerals
can be used.
• Name
Input the FC Host Name (required). Between 1 and 16 alphanumeric characters,
symbols (except ', (comma)' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be
used.
• Host Response
Specify the host response for the target host (required). Refer to "ETERNUS DX Disk
storage systems User’s Guide -Server Connection-" for details.
75
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.1 Configuration Wizard
→ The target FC host is displayed in the "Registered FC Host List" field.
To add multiple FC hosts, repeat the procedure for all the FC hosts to be added.
- For iSCSI host
• iSCSI Port
The list of iSCSI ports that exist in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 is displayed.
• iSCSI Name
Select the iSCSI Name, or directly input the iSCSI Name. Between 4 and 223
alphanumeric characters and symbols (required) can be used.
In the following conditions, iSCSI Name cannot be obtained
automatically:
• When the [Discover] button is inactivated
• When "Disable" is selected for the "iSNS server" in the "Set
iSCSI Port Parameters"
• IP address
Specify the IP address of the iSCSI host.
When the IP address is not used for registering the host, this item is not required.
• Name
Specify the target host (iSCSI port) name (required). Between 1 and 16 alphanumeric
characters, symbols (except ', (comma)' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and
blanks can be used.
• Host Response
Specify the host response for the target host (required). Refer to "ETERNUS DX Disk
storage systems User’s Guide -Server Connection-" for details.
• Alias Name
Specify the alias name of the target host (iSCSI port). Up to 31 alphanumeric
characters and symbols can be used.
• CHAP User ID
Specify the user ID that accesses the target host (iSCSI port). Up to 255 alphanumeric
characters and symbols can be used.
It is not necessary to set this item if CHAP Authentication is not performed.
76
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.1 Configuration Wizard
• CHAP Password
Specify the password to access the target host. Between 12 and 100 alphanumeric
characters and symbols can be used.
Make sure to set the user name and password in pairs.
• Confirm CHAP Password
Enter the same password as in the CHAP Password field.
→ The target iSCSI host is displayed in the "Registered iSCSI Host List" field.
To add multiple iSCSI hosts, repeat the procedure for all the iSCSI hosts to be added.
- For SAS host
• SAS Port
The list of SAS ports that exist in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 is displayed.
• SAS Address
Select the SAS address, or directly input a SAS address (required). 16 capital letters
and numerals can be used.
• Name
Specify the target host (SAS port) name (required). Between 1 and 16 alphanumeric
characters, symbols (except ', (comma)' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and
blanks can be used.
• Host Response
Specify the host response for the target host (required). Refer to "ETERNUS DX Disk
storage systems User’s Guide -Server Connection-" for details.
77
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.1 Configuration Wizard
→ The target SAS host is displayed in the "Registered SAS Host List" field.
To add multiple SAS hosts, repeat the procedure for all the SAS hosts to be added.
10 When registering hosts completes, click the [Done] button.
- For FC host
78
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.1 Configuration Wizard
- For iSCSI host
- For SAS host
79
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.1 Configuration Wizard
11 Click the [Next >] button.
- For FC host
- For iSCSI host
80
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.1 Configuration Wizard
- For SAS host
→ A confirmation screen appears.
12 Click the [OK] button.
→ The specified host setting is registered. Move on to the [Configure Affinity Group]
screen.
13 Click the [Create] button.
Creating affinity group is required when using the host affinity
function. When the host affinity function is not used, click the [Next >]
button to move on to the "Configure LUN Mapping" setting menu.
Also, this setting is not required when using an existing affinity group
(displayed in the "List of Affinity Group(s)" field).
When using the existing affinity group, select the target group from
the "List of Affinity Group(s)" field and click the [Edit] button.
81
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.1 Configuration Wizard
→ The "Affinity Group Setting" and "Define LUN Mapping" fields are displayed.
14 Enter the affinity group name and specify a volume number corresponding to the
LUN, and click the [Set] button.
Specify the affinity group name. Between 1 and 16 alphanumeric characters, symbols
(except ', (comma)' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be used.
A LUN is displayed as a decimal number. Set the volume number as a decimal number.
→ A confirmation screen appears.
82
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.1 Configuration Wizard
15 Click the [OK] button.
16 Click the [Next >] button.
→ Move on to the [Define LUN Mapping] screen.
83
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.1 Configuration Wizard
17 Select the port that is connected to the target server from the "Port List" field.
For ETERNUS DX90, only ports where the port mode is "CA" are
displayed. Refer to "5.4.8 Modify Port Mode" (page 184) for detailed
information about port modes.
■ When using the Host Affinity function:
(1)Click the [Edit] button.
→ The "Host Affinity Setting" field is displayed.
(2)Assign the affinity group to the server, and click the [Set] button.
→ A confirmation screen appears.
84
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.1 Configuration Wizard
(3)Click the [OK] button.
→ Returns to the "Port List" screen.
■ When the Host Affinity function is not used:
(1)Click the [Edit] button.
Click the [Copy] button to copy the LUN mapping information from
the other port.
→ The [Define LUN Mapping] field is displayed.
85
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.1 Configuration Wizard
(2)Adjust the LUN mapping information for the target port, and click the [Set] button.
→ A confirmation screen appears.
(3)Click the [OK] button.
→ Returns to the "Port List" screen.
86
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.1 Configuration Wizard
18 Click the [Finish] button.
→ A confirmation screen appears.
19 Click the [OK] button.
→ The Configuration Wizard screen is closed.
End of procedure
87
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.2 RAID Group Management
5.2
RAID Group Management
The following settings are available for RAID group management.
• Create/Delete RAID Group
• Assign/Release Hot Spare
• Logical Device Expansion
• Set RAID Group name
• Set Eco-mode Schedule
• Change CM Ownership
5.2.1
Create RAID Group
When changing the RAID settings or adding extra disks, you need to create new RAID groups.
You can confirm the groups that are created from the [RAID Group Status] menu on the [Status]
tab.
● Number of disks that can be set for each RAID level
The number of disks that can be set for each RAID level is as follows.
The available number of disks varies according to ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90.
RAID level
Number of disks that can be created
ETERNUS DX60
ETERNUS DX80/DX90
Recommended number
of disks
RAID0
2 − 16
2 − 16
−
RAID1
2
2
2(1D+1M)
RAID1+0
4 − 24
4 − 32
4(2D+2M), 6(3D+3M),
8(4D+4M), 10(5D+5M)
RAID5
3 − 16
3 − 16
3(2D+1P), 4(3D+1P),
5(4D+1P), 6(5D+1P)
RAID6
5 − 16
5 − 16
5(3D+2P), 6(4D+2P),
7(5D+2P)
RAID5+0
(3 − 12) × 2
(3 − 12) × 2
3(2D+1P) × 2, 4(3D+1P) × 2,
5(4D+1P) × 2, 6(5D+1P) × 2
88
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.2 RAID Group Management
● The maximum number of RAID groups that can be set to each RAID level
The maximum number of RAID groups that can be created is 12 for the ETERNUS DX60, and
60 for the ETERNUS DX80/DX90.
The maximum number of RAID groups that can be set for each RAID level is as follows.
The available number of RAID groups varies according to each device.
RAID level
Number of RAID groups that can be created
ETERNUS DX60
ETERNUS DX80/DX90
RAID0
12
60
RAID1
12
60
RAID1+0
6
30
RAID5
8
40
RAID6
4
24
RAID5+0
4
20
● The maximum number of volumes that can be set
The maximum number of volumes that can be set for each RAID group and device is as
follows.
The available number of volumes varies according to each device.
Device name
per RAID group
per device
ETERNUS DX60
128
512
ETERNUS DX80/DX90
128
1024
• RAID groups can be created when the disk satisfies all the following
conditions:
- The disk is not one that configures a RAID group
- The disk is not specified as a hot spare
- The disk status is "Available" or "Present"
• In the following conditions, RAID groups cannot be created:
- There are no disks to configure the RAID group
- When the maximum number of RAID groups has already been
created
Creating RAID groups is required before creating volumes.
The procedure to create a RAID group is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Create RAID Group] under the [RAID Group Management] menu on
the [Volume Settings] tab.
→ The [Create RAID Group] screen appears.
89
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.2 RAID Group Management
2
Specify the following items, and click the [Next >] button.
Select one of the following items:
• Create RAID Group (Disks are assigned automatically)
Creates a RAID group with automatically selected disks.
• Create RAID Group (Disks are selected manually)
Creates a RAID group with user specified disks.
- Create RAID Group (Disks are assigned automatically)
- Create RAID Group (Disks are selected manually)
→ The "New RAID Group" field is displayed.
90
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.2 RAID Group Management
3
Specify the following items, and click the [Create] button.
• RAID Group Name
Enter the RAID group name to be created.
Between 1 and 16 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ', (comma)' and '?', and
'% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be used.
• RAID Level
Select the RAID level.
Only the configurable RAID level depending on the currently installed disks are
displayed.
When specifying the disks manually, selectable RAID level options are narrowed down.
• Disk Capacity
When selecting "Create RAID Group (Disks are assigned automatically)" in Step 2,
select the disk capacity and number of disks to be used in the RAID group.
Capacity is displayed only for the disks that are actually installed and can create the
selected RAID group.
Available number of disks varies depending on the specified RAID level.
- RAID0: 2 − 16
- RAID1: 2
- RAID1+0: 4 − 32 (even number)
- RAID5: 3 − 16
- RAID6: 5 − 16
- RAID5+0: 6 − 32 (even number)
• Assigned CM
Select the assigned CM for the RAID group from "Automatic", "CM#0", or "CM#1".
Normally, select the "Automatic". When the "Automatic" is selected, the control CM to
be assigned varies according to the RAID group number. If the RAID group number is
an even number, CM#0 is assigned to the new RAID group. For an odd number RAID
group, CM#1 is assigned to the new RAID group.
When the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 has only one CM, CM#1
cannot be specified as the Assigned CM.
• Select Disk
When "Create RAID Group (Disks are selected manually)" is selected in Step 2, select
the disks to be registered in the RAID Group (required).
• A RAID group name that is already registered in the ETERNUS
DX60/DX80/DX90 cannot be specified.
• It is not possible to select more than, or less than, the specified
number of configuration disks for each RAID level.
• RAID0 has no data redundancy. RAID1, RAID1+0, RAID5,
RAID6, and RAID5+0 are recommended for the RAID level.
• If disks of different capacities exist in a RAID group, the smallest
capacity becomes the standard, and all other disks are regarded
as having the same capacity as the smallest disk.
In this case, the remaining disk space will NOT be used.
• SSD and SAS disks (SAS or Nearline SAS) cannot exist together
in a single RAID group.
91
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.2 RAID Group Management
- Create RAID Group (Disks are assigned automatically)
- Create RAID Group (Disks are selected manually)
→ A confirmation screen appears.
4
Click the [OK] button.
→ The RAID group is created.
92
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.2 RAID Group Management
Refer to "5.2.5 Logical Device Expansion" (page 98) or "5.2.8
Change CM Ownership" (page 109) to change the setting items after
creating the RAID group.
End of procedure
5.2.2
Delete RAID Group
The [Delete RAID Group] function deletes the registered RAID groups. When a RAID group is
deleted, the status of the disks that configured the RAID group change to data disks that are not
used by any RAID group.
RAID groups that have volumes registered cannot be deleted. All volumes
must be deleted before deleting a RAID group. Refer to "5.3.2 Delete
Volume" (page 114) for procedure to delete volumes.
The procedure to delete RAID group is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Delete RAID Group] under the [RAID Group Management] menu on
the [Volume Settings] tab.
→ The [Delete RAID Group] function screen appears.
2
Select the target RAID group, and click the [Delete] button.
→ A confirmation screen appears.
93
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.2 RAID Group Management
3
Click the [OK] button.
→ The selected RAID group is deleted.
End of procedure
5.2.3
Assign Hot Spare
The [Assign Hot Spare] function registers a hot spare, which enables automatic data copy
(Rebuild) in the background when a disk failure occurs.
Hot spare is a disk that is available as a substitute for a failed disk.
There are two types of hot spare as follows:
• Global Hot Spare
Hot spare used by all the RAID groups
• Dedicated Hot Spare
Hot spare used by the dedicated RAID group (one specific RAID group)
A "Global Hot Spare" is a shared hot spare prepared in case a failure occurs in a RAID group.
When preparing hot spares for a specific RAID group, register them as "Dedicated Hot Spare".
Note the following items when adding a hot spare:
• A system disk (Slot#0 to Slot#1 of the controller enclosure) cannot be
specified as a hot spare.
• A hot spare that substitutes for a failed disk must have the same or a
larger capacity than the data disk. If the hot spare capacity is smaller
than the data disk, the disk does not work as the hot spare.
• Generally, a hot spare can be installed in any slot, with the exception of
system disk installation locations.
• When switching in a hot spare for a failed disk, a hot spare with the
same capacity as the failed disk will be used first. If such a hot spare
does not exist, a large capacity hot spare will be used (when there are
multiple numbers of such disks, the smallest capacity hot spare among
them is used). Note that a Global Hot Spare is used in this situation.
• When you replace a failed disk, the data is copied back from the hot
spare that is substituting for the failed disk, and the hot spare disk then
returns to a spare disk.
• When a mix of SAS disks, Nearline SAS disks, and SSDs are installed
together in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90, hot spare of each type is
required. Install the hot spare that has the same capacity as the largest
capacity disks of the same type installed in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/
DX90.
94
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.2 RAID Group Management
The procedure to assign a hot spare is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Assign Hot Spare] under the [RAID Group Management] menu on the
[Volume Settings] tab.
→ The [Assign Hot Spare] screen appears.
2
Specify the following items, and click the [Assign] button.
• Hot Spare Type
Select from the following items:
- Global Hot Spare
Global hot spare is shared by any RAID group in the device.
- Dedicated Hot Spare
Dedicated hot spare is used by specified RAID group.
• Select an existing RAID Group
When selecting the "Dedicated Hot Spare", specify the target RAID group.
• Select Disk
Select the disk to be used as hot spare.
- When adding "Global Hot Spare"
95
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.2 RAID Group Management
- When adding "Dedicated Hot Spare"
→ A confirmation screen appears.
3
Click the [OK] button.
→ The hot spare is added.
End of procedure
5.2.4
Release Hot Spare
The [Release Hot Spare] function deletes a registered hot spare. A released disk can be used as
a data disk after it is registered in a RAID group.
Hot spare cannot be deleted in the following conditions:
• When the usage of the hot spare is other than "Spare"
• When the status of the hot spare is other than "Present"
• When one of the following operations is in progress:
- Registering controller firmware
- Applying controller firmware
- Registering disk firmware
- Applying disk firmware
- During the RAID group diagnosis
- During the disk diagnosis
96
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.2 RAID Group Management
The procedure to delete hot spare is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Release Hot Spare] under the [RAID Group Management] menu on
the [Volume Settings] tab.
→ The [Release Hot Spare] screen appears.
2
Specify the following items, and click the [Release] button.
• Hot Spare Type
Select one of the following as a condition of the hot spare to be released.
- Global Hot Spare
Global hot spare is shared by any RAID group in the device.
- Dedicated Hot Spare
Dedicated hot spare is used by a specified RAID group.
• Criteria for Target Disk
This field is displayed when selecting the "Dedicated Hot Spare". If the "Specify RAID
Group" checkbox is selected, the target RAID group can be specified.
• Select Disk
Select the disk to be released as hot spare.
- When releasing "Global Hot Spare"
97
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.2 RAID Group Management
- When releasing "Dedicated Hot Spare"
→ A confirmation screen appears.
3
Click the [OK] button.
→ The selected hot spare is deleted.
End of procedure
5.2.5
Logical Device Expansion
The [Logical Device Expansion] function expands the capacity of an existing RAID group by adding new disks or changing RAID levels.
Normally, volume expansion requires adding RAID groups. This method requires multiple disks
to be installed (used). However, this function can add disks to the existing RAID group in units of
one disk. This enables capacity expansion of RAID groups with smaller number of disk expansion.
This function can be performed with taking over data in the disks.
98
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.2 RAID Group Management
• Disks that are a different type (SAS/SSD) than the disks that configure
the RAID group cannot be added.
• Logical Device Expansion is not available in the following conditions:
- RAID groups are not in normal status (Rebuilding, Copybacking, or
using hot spare etc.)
- When another Logical Device Expansion is being performed
- When the disk diagnosis or RAID group diagnosis is in progress
- When changing CM ownership (assigned CM) of the target RAID
group
- When the volume encryption, formatting volume, or LUN concatenation is in progress in the target RAID group
- When the target RAID level or changed RAID level is RAID5+0
- Changing RAID level to RAID0
Note that existing volume size is not changed even if the RAID level is
changed or capacity is expanded.
The procedure for Logical Device Expansion is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Logical Device Expansion] under the [RAID Group Management]
menu on the [Volume Settings] tab.
→ The [Logical Device Expansion] screen appears.
2
Select the target RAID group, and click the [Next >] button.
→ The "Modify RAID Group Configuration" screen appears.
99
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.2 RAID Group Management
3
Specify the following items, and click the [Next >] button.
• RAID Level
Select (change) the RAID level.
Only for adding disks, changing RAID level is not required.
• Select Disk
Select (add) disks according to the new RAID level.
→ A confirmation screen appears.
4
Click the [Start] button.
→ A confirmation screen appears.
100
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.2 RAID Group Management
5
Click the [OK] button.
→ Logical Device Expansion is performed.
End of procedure
5.2.6
Set RAID Group Name
The [Set RAID Group Name] function can change the existing RAID group name.
The procedure to change RAID group name is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Set RAID Group Name] under the [RAID Group Management] menu
on the [Volume Settings] tab.
→ The [Set RAID Group Name] screen appears.
2
Change the target RAID group name, and click the [Set] button.
Specify a new RAID group name. Between 1 and 16 alphanumeric characters, symbols
(except ', (comma)' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be used.
RAID group name that is already registered in the ETERNUS DX60/
DX80/DX90 cannot be specified.
→ A confirmation screen appears.
101
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.2 RAID Group Management
3
Click the [OK] button.
→ The RAID group name is changed.
End of procedure
5.2.7
Set Eco-mode Schedule
Eco-mode is a function that is specifically designed to reduce the power consumption that is
characteristic of Massive Arrays of Idle Disks (MAID).
Eco-mode saves power by managing the scheduled operation times of specified disks and stopping the motors of disks during periods when they are not required.
The scheduled operation times can be set for each RAID group and for operations such as
backing up.
The [Set Eco-mode Schedule] provides the following functions:
● Eco-mode General Setting
Enables or disables the Eco-mode setting for ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90.
● Eco-mode Schedule Setting
Specifies the disk operating time (term for activating disk motor constantly) as an Eco-mode
schedule.
● Apply Eco-mode Schedule
Applies the created Eco-mode schedule for each RAID group.
Disk operation time varies depending on the Eco-mode schedule settings and disk access.
A disk is spun up even if it is outside of disk operation time in the following conditions:
• If an access occurs while a motor is stopped
The disk is immediately spun up and access proceeds normally after one to three minutes.
• If a disk is activated more than a set amount of times in a day
A state of increased access frequency is assumed and the Eco-mode will cease stopping the
disk motor.
102
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.2 RAID Group Management
The following shows examples:
• Operation schedule is set as 9:00 to 21:00, the allowed number of activations is one time, and
there are no accesses outside of the scheduled period
1:00
9:00
Stopped
21:00
0:00
Stopped
Scheduled Operation
Drive Motor Running
First
activation
Motor is spun up 30 minutes
before start of operating time
Motor is stopped 30 minutes
after end of operating time
• Operation schedule is set as 9:00 to 21:00, the allowed number of activations is one time, and
there are accesses outside of the scheduled period
No. of activations
reset to 0 at 0:00
Access
1:00
9:00
21:00
Access finishes
Scheduled Operation
Drive Motors Running
Drive Motors Running
Drive Motors Running
First activation:
Count: 1
Motors spun up 30 minutes
before start of scheduled time
Second
activation:
Count: 2
Access OK in
1 - 3 minutes
Motors stopped 30 minutes
after end of scheduled time
0:00
Reset:
Count: 0
Disk motors left running
after access has finished
because this was
the 2nd activation
103
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.2 RAID Group Management
• To perform schedule operations using this function, the Eco-mode
setting for the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 must be enabled.
• Eco-mode is not available for the following disks.
- System disks
- Hot spares
- SSD
- Disks in a RAID group the satisfies the following conditions:
• A RAID group including system disks
• A RAID group where no volume is registered
• A RAID group where SDPVs are registered
• If any of the following conditions occur during the Eco-mode scheduled
time, the disk motor is not inactivated. Note that the Eco-mode schedule
will be re-enabled when these conditions have finished.
- Target RAID group or volume status is other than "Available"
- Performing functions that changes RAID group or volume
configuration
- During maintenance
- During host access
- During disk or RAID group diagnosis
- Exporting G-List
- Changing assigned CM for RAID group
- Module error related to access path to the controller modules and
disks is detected
• When setting the Eco-mode for the Advanced Copy source/destination,
it is necessary to schedule a disk motor to be activated while performing
Advanced Copy. If it is difficult to schedule, do not set the Eco-mode to
the copy source/destination. If the disks are inactivated, the Advanced
Copy cannot be executed.
• REC does not require that a disk motor be scheduled for activation while
performing REC. If the disk motor was inactivated when REC started,
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 activates the disk motor automatically
and starts the copy operation.
• The target disks where Eco-mode schedule can be set are SAS disks
and Nearline SAS disks. SSDs are not available for this function.
Eco-mode General Setting
Enables or disables the Eco-mode setting for ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90.
The procedure for Eco-mode General Setting is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Set Eco-mode Schedule] under the [RAID Group Management] menu
on the [Volume Settings] tab.
→ The [Set Eco-mode Schedule] screen appears.
104
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.2 RAID Group Management
2
Specify the following items, and click the [Set] button.
• Eco-mode
Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the Eco-mode for ETERNUS DX60/DX80/
DX90.
→ A confirmation screen appears.
3
Click the [OK] button.
→ Eco-mode commonness setting is applied.
End of procedure
Eco-mode Schedule Setting
Specify the disk operation time as an Eco-mode schedule.
Up to 64 Eco-mode schedules can be created.
The procedure to create the Eco-mode schedule is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Set Eco-mode Schedule] under the [RAID Group Management] menu
on the [Volume Settings] tab.
→ The [Set Eco-mode Schedule] screen appears.
2
Click the "Schedule" icon from the tree in the left of the screen.
→ The "Schedule" field is displayed.
105
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.2 RAID Group Management
3
Click the [Create] button.
→ The setting fields for new schedule is displayed.
When changing or deleting the Eco-mode schedules, select the
target event in the "Schedule" field or the tree in the left of the
screen, and click the [Set] or [Delete] button.
4
Set the following items.
• Schedule Name
Specify the schedule name. Between 1 and 16 alphanumeric characters, symbols
(except ', (comma)' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be used.
• Event List
Set the schedule event in this field. Click the [Add] button.
The "Set Event" field is displayed.
Up to eight events per schedule can be created.
106
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.2 RAID Group Management
• When changing the event details, select the target event, and
click the [Edit] button.
• When deleting the event, select the target event(s) to be deleted
(multiple selections can be made), and click the [Delete] button.
• Clicking the [Delete All] button deletes all the specified events in
the schedule.
• Set Event
Specify the following items, and click the [Apply] button.
- Event Type
Select one of the following items:
• everyday
• Every week
• Specific days
• Specific week
Also, enter a Month (when selecting "Every week" or "Specific week"), Period
(when selecting other than "everyday"), and start/end time of the disk activation.
107
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.2 RAID Group Management
5
Click the [Set] button.
→ A confirmation screen appears.
6
Click the [OK] button.
→ The new Eco-mode schedule setting is started.
End of procedure
Apply Eco-mode Schedule
This function applies the Eco-mode schedule to the RAID group.
The procedure to apply the Eco-mode schedule is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Set Eco-mode Schedule] under the [RAID Group Management] menu
on the [Volume Settings] tab.
→ The [Set Eco-mode Schedule] screen appears.
2
Click the "RAID Groups" icon from the tree in the left of the screen.
→ The "Assign RAID Groups" field is displayed.
108
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.2 RAID Group Management
3
Specify the following items, and click the [Set] button.
• Schedule Name
Select the Eco-mode schedule to be applied
When disabling the Eco-mode schedule for the relevant RAID group, select "Disable".
When external software controls the Eco-mode, "External" is displayed.
• Action
Select "ON" to enable the Eco-mode schedule specified in "Schedule Name" in the
target RAID group. Select "OFF" to disable the Eco-mode schedule.
→ A confirmation screen appears.
4
Click the [OK] button.
→ The Eco-mode schedule is applied for the RAID groups.
End of procedure
5.2.8
Change CM Ownership
The [Change CM Ownership] function changes the assigned CM (CM ownership) specified when
creating the RAID group.
Normally, CM ownership is automatically allocated. If the load is not balanced evenly between
CMs, CM ownership can be manually allocated in order to balance the load.
When the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 has only one CM, the assigned
CM cannot be changed.
109
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.2 RAID Group Management
• This function cannot be used in the following conditions:
- No RAID groups are registered in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90
- Logical Device Expansion is in progress
- Pinned data exists in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90
- RAID migration is in progress
- A REC buffer whose usage is not set as "Unused" is registered
- RAID group status is other than "Available"
- RAID group is blocked
- Volumes which are being encrypted exist
- Volumes which are being formatted exist
• During CM ownership change, the device status is changed from Write
Back mode to Write Through mode. Consider the workload when using
this function.
The procedure to change RAID group assigned CM is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Change CM Ownership] under the [RAID Group Management] menu
on the [Volume Settings] tab.
→ The [Change CM Ownership] screen appears.
2
Specify the following items, and click the [Change] button.
• Select Automatic or Manual assignment of ownership.
Select the method for assigning the CM from "Auto" or "Manual".
If changing the current setting, a confirmation screen appears.
• RAID Group List
When selecting the "Manual" for "Select Automatic or Manual assignment of
ownership." field, specify the assigned CM for the RAID group.
→ A confirmation screen appears.
110
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.3 Volume Management
3
Click the [OK] button.
→ The assigned CM is changed.
End of procedure
5.3
Volume Management
The following settings are available as the volume management.
• Create/Delete Volume
• Format Volume
• Encrypt Volume
• LUN Concatenation
• RAID Migration
• Initialize Snap Data Volume
• Release Reservation
• Set Volume Name
• Configure LUN Mapping
5.3.1
Create Volume
The [Create Volume] function creates the volumes in the existing RAID group.
Open or Snap Data Volume (SDV) can be created with this function. After completing the volume
creation, the new volumes are formatted automatically.
Volumes can be accessed from the host when created in the RAID group and LUN mapped.
● The maximum number of volumes that can be registered
The following table shows the maximum number of volumes can be created for each device.
Device Type
per RAID group
per Device
ETERNUS DX60
128
512
ETERNUS DX80/DX90
128
1024
111
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.3 Volume Management
• When the maximum number of volumes has already been created in the
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90, more volumes cannot be created. In this
case, to create a new volume, first delete volumes using the "5.3.2
Delete Volume" (page 114) function, and then try creating a new volume
again.
• A volume is allocated to uninterrupted free space in the order of
creation.
If an area with the necessary capacity cannot be acquired from the free
space available, use the "5.3.5 LUN Concatenation" (page 120) function
to concatenate multiple spaces into a volume.
SDV is the Snap Data Volume that is required for SnapOPC+. Refer to
"5.4.2 Manage Copy Session" (page 152) for details about SnapOPC+.
The procedure to create a volume is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Create Volume] under the [Volume Management] menu on the
[Volume Settings] tab.
→ The [Create Volume] screen appears.
2
Select the RAID group where the volumes are created from the tree in the left of
the screen, or RAID Group List.
→ The detailed information of the selected RAID group is displayed.
112
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.3 Volume Management
3
Specify the following items, and click the [Create] button.
• Volume Name
Specify the volume name. Between 1 and 16 alphanumeric characters, symbols
(except ', (comma)' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be used.
• Type
Select the volume type (Open or SDV).
• Capacity (MB)
Specify the volume capacity to be created in units of MB.
Set the value between 24 to 8388607 (MB), or the maximum capacity of the RAID
group.
When creating an SDV, the total SDV capacity (MB) and 0.1% of the
copy source volume capacity is secured in the ETERNUS DX60/
DX80/DX90. 0.1% of the copy source volume is the capacity used for
the controlling information area in the SDV.
• Source Volume Capacity (MB) (SDV only)
Specify the total capacity of the copy source for SDV in units of MB.
Set the value between 64 to 8388607 (MB).
• Encryption
Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" encryption mode for the new volume.
An encrypted volume cannot be changed to non-encrypted volumes.
Refer to "5.3.4 Encrypt Volume" (page 118) for details.
• Number of Volumes
When creating multiple volumes of the same type and capacity, set the number of
volumes to be created. A created volume name is "specified volume name + running
number starting from 0".
→ A confirmation screen appears.
113
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.3 Volume Management
4
Click the [OK] button.
→ The volumes are created.
End of procedure
5.3.2
Delete Volume
The [Delete Volume] function deletes the volumes in the RAID group.
Make sure to backup any necessary data before proceeding.
• The following volumes cannot be deleted.
- Volumes that are allocated to a Host Affinity or mapped LUN.
- Volumes during RAID migration.
- Copy source and destination volumes during Advanced Copy
session.
• A volume is allocated to uninterrupted free space in order of creation.
When a volume is deleted, the space where the volume existed
becomes free space. By repeating creation and deletion of volumes,
free space may be dispersed in the RAID group.
• Up to 128 volumes can be deleted at once.
The procedure to delete a volume is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Delete Volume] under the [Volume Management] menu on the
[Volume Settings] tab.
→ The [Delete Volume] screen appears.
114
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.3 Volume Management
2
Select the volume to be deleted from the "Volume List" field (multiple selections
can be made), and click the [Delete] button.
→ A confirmation screen appears.
3
Click the [OK] button.
→ The selected volumes are deleted.
End of procedure
115
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.3 Volume Management
5.3.3
Format Volume
The [Format Volume] function is used to format (clear data in) the selected volume.
• If selecting and formatting a volume that is in use, the data stored in the
volume will be deleted.
• For a newly created volume, formatting with this function is not required.
Newly created volumes are formatted automatically.
• When disk diagnosis or RAID group diagnosis are in progress, this function cannot be performed.
• The following volumes cannot be formatted.
- Volumes with a status other than "Readying" or "Available"
- Volumes in the RAID group during Logical Device Expansion
- Volumes for which Advanced Copy is being performed
- Volumes during RAID migration
• When a volume is being formatted, some settings and functions cannot
be performed.
• When canceling the volume format, delete the target volume.
Progress of formatting can be checked from the [Volume Status] menu on
the [Status] tab.
The procedure to format a volume is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Format Volume] under the [Volume Management] menu on the
[Volume Settings] tab.
→ The [Format Volume] screen appears.
116
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.3 Volume Management
2
Select the volume to be formatted from the tree in the left of the screen, or
"Volume List" field (multiple selections can be made), and click the [Format]
button.
→ A confirmation screen appears.
3
Click the [OK] button.
→ The selected volumes are formatted.
End of procedure
117
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.3 Volume Management
5.3.4
Encrypt Volume
The [Encrypt Volume] function encrypts the data in the disks to prevent the data leakage caused
by theft or loss when removing disks.
• When encrypting volumes, enable the encryption mode using the "6.4.3
Setup Encryption Mode" (page 238) function. However, when the "Setup
Encryption Mode" is not displayed in the menu, the encryption function
is not available. However, when the encryption function is not available,
the "Setup Encryption Mode" is not displayed in the menu.
• This function prevents data leakage from removal of disks. Therefore,
when accessing from the server, data in the disks is not encrypted. Note
that this function cannot prevent data leakage by server access.
• Once a volume has been encrypted, it cannot be changed back to a
non-encrypted volume.
• Canceling volume encryption is not possible.
• This function cannot be used under the following conditions:
- Encryption mode is not set (refer to "6.4.3 Setup Encryption Mode"
(page 238))
- A warning status component exists in the controller enclosure
- There is no volume to be encrypted
• Volumes in the following conditions cannot be selected as an encryption
target volume (not displayed in the Volume List).
- Volumes which are not in normal status (Rebuilding/Copybacking,
etc.)
- Volumes which are being formatted
- Volumes in RAID migration operation
- Volumes in a RAID group in which Logical Device Expansion is being
executed
- Volumes which are already encrypted
- Volumes which are being encrypted
• When encrypting Advanced Copy target volumes, both the copy source
and copy destination volumes must be encrypted.
• The following performance may be degraded for encrypted volumes
compared with non-encrypted volumes.
- Access to the encrypted volumes
- Copy transfer of encrypted volumes
The progress of an encryption operation can be checked from [Volume
Status] menu on the [Status] tab screen.
118
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.3 Volume Management
The procedure to encrypt a volume is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Encrypt Volume] under the [Volume Management] menu on the
[Volume Settings] tab.
→ The [Encrypt Volume] screen appears.
2
Select the volume to be encrypted from the "Volume List" field (multiple
selections can be made), and click the [Encrypt] button.
→ A confirmation screen appears.
3
Click the [OK] button.
→ The selected volume is encrypted.
End of procedure
119
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.3 Volume Management
5.3.5
LUN Concatenation
LUN concatenation adds new space for volumes and expands the volume capacity that can be
used from the server.
This function enables the use of free area in the RAID group, and solves capacity shortages.
This function obtains the area to be used for capacity expansion from unused areas in an existing RAID group. LUN concatenation creates a new volume with the obtained area, and concatenates these volumes to be used as a large capacity volume.
Concatenation of multiple free areas from different RAID groups is possible. Also, concatenation
is possible even if the RAID levels of the groups are different.
Up to 16 volumes can be concatenated. The maximum volume capacity after concatenation is
32TB.
● Conditions of the volumes to be concatenated
•
•
•
•
•
•
The volume type must be "Open" (Open volume)
The volume status must be "Available"
The volume capacity must be 1024MB or larger
Cannot be concatenated during RAID Migration
Cannot be concatenated when there is an Advanced Copy session
The RAID group to which the volume belongs is not in the Logical Device Expansion process
● Conditions of RAID groups to obtain unused area
•
•
•
•
The RAID Group status must be "Available"
A RAID group with less than 128 volumes registered
A RAID group must not be blocked
The free space in the RAID group must be 1024MB or larger
• Concatenation of volumes is not possible in RAID groups configured
with disks of different types (SAS/SSD).
• When expanding the existing volume capacity using the [LUN
Concatenation] function, the server is required to recognize the
expanded volume capacity after the concatenation.
A new concatenated volume is automatically formatted. The progress of
formatting may be checked in the [Volume Status] screen on the [Status]
tab.
The procedure for LUN Concatenation is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [LUN Concatenation] under the [Volume Management] menu on the
[Volume Settings] tab.
→ The [LUN Concatenation] screen appears.
120
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.3 Volume Management
2
Select the volume to be concatenated from the tree in the left of the screen, or
Volume List.
→ Detailed information of the target volume is displayed.
3
Click the [Next >] button.
121
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.3 Volume Management
4
Set the following items, and click the [Concatenation] button.
• RAID Group
Select the existing RAID group where the concatenation volume is obtained.
• Capacity (MB)
Specify the capacity of concatenation volume, and click the [Add] button.
The capacity of a volume that can be added must be 1024MB or larger.
Concatenation volume is added in the "Volume Information" field.
→ A confirmation screen appears.
5
Click the [OK] button.
→ LUN concatenation is started.
End of procedure
5.3.6
RAID Migration
This function migrates a volume in a RAID group to a free area in another RAID group.
Setting (expanding) the volume capacity is also available.
This function enables load balancing of host access. Creation and format of new volumes and
host interface establishment are automatically performed. Because data in the volume will be
moved to a new volume, users are allowed to access the data anytime without being affected by
the migration. After the RAID migration is completed, the migration source volume is deleted.
122
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.3 Volume Management
● Conditions of the migration source volume
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The volume type must be "Open" (Open volume)
The volume status must be "Available"
Cannot be migrated while formatting
Cannot be migrated during RAID Migration
Cannot be migrated during Advanced Copy
Cannot be migrated during encryption
A concatenated volume cannot be migrated
The RAID group to which the volume belongs is not in the Logical Device Expansion process.
The total capacity of the Open Volume to be migrated and the capacity of the volumes being
migrated must not exceed 8TB
● Conditions of the migration destination RAID group
•
•
•
•
The number of volumes in the RAID group must be less than 128
The status of the RAID group must be "Available" or "Present"
A RAID group must not be blocked
The free area (sequential space) for the RAID group must be equal to or larger than the
migration source volume capacity
• The migration destination is not in the same RAID group as the migration source (migration in
the same RAID group is not available)
• The RAID group to which the volume belongs is not in the Logical Device Expansion process.
● Conditions of the RAID migration session
• Up to 32 RAID migration sessions can be migrated at the same time
• Up to 8TB capacity of RAID migration can be executed at the same time
● The maximum number of volumes that can be registered
RAID Migration creates a new volume. Refer to table "The maximum number of volumes that
can be registered" (page 111) in "5.3.1 Create Volume" (page 111) for the maximum number
of volumes that can be created for ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90.
The procedure for RAID migration is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [RAID Migration] under the [Volume Management] menu on the
[Volume Settings] tab.
→ The [RAID Migration] screen appears.
123
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.3 Volume Management
2
Select the migration source volume, and click the [Next >] button.
→ The "Select Destination RAID Group for the migrated Volume" setting field is displayed.
3
Select the migration destination RAID group, and click the [Next >] button.
→ The "Input Volume Capacity" setting field is displayed.
124
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.3 Volume Management
4
Input the new volume capacity (in MB), and click the [Next >] button.
Specifying (Expanding) the target volume capacity is available at the RAID migration.
Added capacity is created as a new volume in the migration destination RAID group.
5
Click the [Migration] button.
→ A confirmation screen appears.
125
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.3 Volume Management
6
Click the [OK] button.
→ The RAID migration process is started.
If the RAID migration process cannot be continued during the
operation, the process is canceled and the RAID migration
destination volume is deleted.
End of procedure
5.3.7
Initialize Snap Data Volume
The [Initialize Snap Data Volume] function initializes the management information for the Snap
Data Volume (SDV) that is created as the copy destination for SnapOPC+.
When using the SnapOPC+, create the Snap Data Volume as the copy destination from the
screen to create a volume. The Snap Data Volume includes the data area and copy management information area.
This function is used to initialize the management information for the Snap Data Volume when
changing the copy source or canceling the copy. Note that data area will not be initialized (formatted).
In the following conditions, the management information for the Snap Data
Volume (SDV) cannot be initialized.
• When there is no volume to be initialized
• When the target volume is not Snap Data Volume
• When the target volume status is not "Available"
• When the copy session is specified for the target volume
• When this function is already in operation in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/
DX90
The procedure to initialize a Snap Data Volume is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Initialize Snap Data Volume] under the [Volume Management] menu
on the [Volume Settings] tab.
→ The [Initialize Snap Data Volume] screen appears.
126
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.3 Volume Management
2
Select the Snap Data Volume to be initialized from the tree in the left of the
screen, or "Volume List" field.
→ The detailed information of the selected volume is displayed.
3
Click the [Initialize] button.
→ A confirmation screen appears.
127
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.3 Volume Management
4
Click the [OK] button.
→ The selected Snap Data Volumes are initialized.
End of procedure
5.3.8
Release Reservation
Some servers may reserve volumes.
A volume in Reserve (Persistent Reserve) status set by the server can be released, and all Reservation Keys can be deleted with GUI.
Normally, the server executes Reserve (occupation) and Release (release occupation) of a volume. This function is used only when the server cannot release the volume reservation because
of a server failure, etc.
Be sure to pay attention when using this function as it may cause data
corruption.
The procedure to release reservation is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Release Reservation] under the [Volume Management] menu on the
[Volume Settings] tab.
→ The [Release Reservation] screen appears.
The following items are displayed:
- No.
The volume number is displayed.
- Name
The volume name is displayed.
- CM Port
The CM port to which the volume is LUN mapped is displayed.
- Affinity Group
When the host affinity function is used, the affinity group to which the volume is LUN
mapped is displayed.
- LUN
The reserved LUN is displayed. When the volume is not reserved, "-" is displayed.
- Registrant Count
The number of Reservation Keys registered in the volume is displayed.
128
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.3 Volume Management
- Reservation Type
When the volume is in persistent reservation status, one of the following persistent
reservation types is displayed.
• WE (Write Exclusive)
• EA (Exclusive Access)
• WE-RO (Write Exclusive-Registrants Only)
• EA-RO (Exclusive Access-Registrants Only)
• WE-AR (Write Exclusive-All Registrants)
• EA-AR (Exclusive Access-All Registrants)
When the volume is in reservation status other than persistent reservation status, "" is displayed.
- Reservation Status
The volume reservation status is displayed.
"Yes": In persistent reservation status
"No": In reservation status, but not in persistent reservation status
"-": Only the reservation key is registered (not reserved)
- APTPL
Whether or not persistent reservation information is kept after the ETERNUS DX60/
DX80/DX90 has been shutdown/rebooted is displayed.
"Yes": The persistent reservation information is kept.
"No": The persistent reservation information is not kept.
When the volume is in reservation status other than persistent reservation status,
"No" is displayed.
2
Select the volumes to release the reservation (multiple selections can be made),
and click the [Release] button.
Clicking the [Reset] button clears selections for all volumes.
→ A confirmation screen appears.
129
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.3 Volume Management
3
Click the [OK] button.
→ The reservation status for the selected volume is released.
End of procedure
5.3.9
Set Volume Name
The [Set Volume Name] function changes the volume name.
The procedure to set volume name is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Set Volume Name] under the [Volume Management] menu on the
[Volume Settings] tab.
→ The [Set Volume Name] screen appears.
2
Select the volume to change the volume name from the tree in the left of the
screen, or "Volume List" field.
→ The "Set Volume Name" field is displayed.
130
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.3 Volume Management
3
Specify the following items, and click the [Set] button.
• Current Volume Name
The current volume name is displayed.
• New Volume Name
Specify a new volume name. Between 1 and 16 alphanumeric characters, symbols
(except ', (comma)' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be used.
Volume name that is already registered in the ETERNUS DX60/
DX80/DX90 cannot be specified.
→ A confirmation screen appears.
4
Click the [OK] button.
→ The volume name is changed.
End of procedure
5.3.10
Configure LUN Mapping
The [Configure LUN Mapping] function sets the relationship between a Logical Unit Number
(LUN) and volume number. LUN mapping enables the server access to the volumes in the
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90.
131
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.3 Volume Management
● Maximum number of LUNs that can be accessed
Note that the number of LUNs that can be accessed varies depending on the host specific
mode of host response that is set for the server.
The following table shows the maximum number of LUN mappings that can be set.
Host specific mode of host response
ETERNUS DX60
ETERNUS DX80/DX90
Normal (other than HP-UX mode)
256
256
HP-UX mode
512
1024
• When changing or deleting LUN mapping during operation, stop access
from the server allocated to the target port.
• To add new LUN mapping, it is not necessary to stop the host access.
• Mapping to a "Work Volume" during RAID Migration is not allowed.
• When no volume is defined, this function cannot be used.
• Host affinity functions cannot be used in the following conditions:
- When no affinity group is registered
- When there is no port for which host affinity is enabled
- When no server is registered to a port for which host affinity is
enabled
• Host affinity group that is allocated to the server cannot be deleted.
• Up to 1024 LUNs can be mapped by connecting two affinity groups.
Servers can access 1024 LUNs only when the host specific mode of the
Host Response is "HP-UX mode". Note this when allocating the server
and the Affinity Group.
When using the Host Affinity function
This section describes the following settings:
• LUN Mapping
• Affinity Group
• Port connected to the server
• Specific information (HBA) for the server to access the affinity group
This function creates an "affinity group", a combination of volumes and LUN (multiple groups
may be created), and allocates them to each server.
The procedure to set LUN mapping when using the Host Affinity function is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Configure LUN Mapping] under the [Volume Management] menu on
the [Volume Settings] tab.
→ The [Configure LUN Mapping] screen appears.
2
Click the "Affinity Group" icon on the left of the screen.
132
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.3 Volume Management
3
Click the [Create] button.
→ The "Affinity Group Setting" and "Define LUN Mapping" fields are displayed.
4
Set the affinity group name, and volume number to be corresponded to the LUN,
and click the [Set] button.
Specify the affinity group name. Between 1 and 16 alphanumeric characters, symbols
(except ', (comma)' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be used.
A LUN is displayed as a decimal number. Set the volume number as a decimal number.
• Clicking the [Specify Range] button displays a screen for specifying the LUN mapping range. In this screen, LUN ranges can be
set (numbers) and corresponding volumes are available.
• Clicking the [Clear] button clears all the volume numbers.
→ A confirmation screen appears.
133
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.3 Volume Management
5
Click the [OK] button.
→ The new affinity group is created. Go on to the next setting to allocate affinity group to
the server.
Repeat Step 1 through Step 5 to set more affinity groups.
6
Click the [Configure LUN Mapping] under the [Volume Management] menu on
the [Volume Settings] tab.
→ The [Configure LUN Mapping] screen appears.
7
Click the "Ports" icon on the left of the screen.
8
Select the port to be connected to the server from the tree in the left of the
screen or Port List.
Select a port in which "Host Affinity" is "Enable".
→ Detailed information of the selected port is displayed.
134
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.3 Volume Management
9
Click the [Edit] button.
→ The "Host Affinity Setting" field is displayed.
10 Allocate the affinity group to the server, and click the [Set] button.
Clicking the [Clear] button changes all the allocated affinity groups to
"Disable"
→ A confirmation screen appears.
135
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.3 Volume Management
11 Click the [OK] button.
→ The host affinity setting is executed. LUN mapping configuration when using an affinity
group completes.
When changing or deleting the an affinity group, select the target
affinity group from the tree in the left of screen or target affinity group
listed in the "Affinity Group List" field, and click the [Edit] or [Delete]
button.
End of procedure
When the Host Affinity function is not used
This section describes the following settings:
• LUN Mapping
• Port connected to the server
This function specifies the Host LUN allocation to the volume for each port.
The procedure to configure LUN Mapping when the Host Affinity function is not used is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Configure LUN Mapping] under the [Volume Management] menu on
the [Volume Settings] tab.
→ The [Configure LUN Mapping] screen appears.
2
Click the "Ports" icon on the left of the screen.
136
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.3 Volume Management
3
Select the target port from the tree in the left of the screen, or Port List.
Select a port in which "Host Affinity" is "Disable".
→ Detailed information of the selected port is displayed.
4
Click the [Edit] button.
→ The "Define LUN Mapping" field is displayed.
137
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.3 Volume Management
5
Change the LUN Mapping information for the target port, and click the [Set]
button.
Set the volume number or volume name to be corresponded to the LUN. The LUN is displayed as a decimal number.
Set the volume number as a decimal number. Set the volume name between 1 and 16
alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ', (comma)' and '?', and '% used as the first letter').
• Clicking the [Specify Range] button displays the screen to specify
the LUN mapping in range. In this screen, setting range of LUNs
(numbers) and corresponding volumes is available.
• Clicking the [Clear] button clears all the volume numbers.
• When deleting the LUN mapping information for the target port,
clear all the volume numbers corresponding to the LUN, and click
the [Set] button.
→ A confirmation screen appears.
6
Click the [OK] button.
→ LUN mapping configuration when an affinity group is not used completes.
End of procedure
138
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.4 Advanced Copy Management
5.4
Advanced Copy Management
Advanced Copy Management provides the following functions.
• Setup Snap Data Pool
• Manage Copy Session
• Register Copy License
• Modify Copy Parameters
• Modify EC/OPC Priority
• Modify Copy Table Size
• Set Copy Path
• Modify Port Mode (*1)
• Modify REC Multiplicity (*1)
• Modify REC Buffer (*1)
*1:
This function is available when using the ETERNUS DX90.
■ Advanced Copy function
Advanced Copy is a function used to quickly copy data (volume) to another volume in the same
device, at any given point in time. By using the copy destination volume, it is possible to backup
data without suspending operations.
The copy function of ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 can be used by the following methods:
• Copy in units of volumes using GUI or CLI command
• Obtaining snapshots of volumes by using the Windows Volume Shadow Copy Service (VSS)
function
• Obtaining backup and replication that is associated with operation by using the ETERNUS SF
AdvancedCopy Manager (ACM)
The copy function of ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 creates a snapshot of the selected volume.
Copy usage (such as backup and replication) and the procedure for copy vary depending on the
OS and software to be used. Refer to the manuals for each OS and software for details.
■ Type of Advanced Copy
Equivalent Copy (EC) function (*2) and One Point Copy (OPC) function (*3) are the available
Advanced Copy functions.
• EC
EC is used when copying large volumes, or when processing time can be estimated easily.
• OPC
OPC is used when it is difficult to estimate the backup time.
*2:
*3:
In this manual, "EC function" indicates EC and Remote Equivalent Copy (REC).
In this manual, "OPC function" indicates OPC, QuickOPC, and SnapOPC+.
GUI provides various settings and status displays for the Advanced Copy
function.
However, only SnapOPC+ sessions can be created using GUI.
139
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.4 Advanced Copy Management
Each function is described below.
● EC (Mirror Breaking method)
EC makes a mirror copy of the copy source to the copy destination beforehand and then
keeping it up to date while it is needed, at which time the mirror relationship is "broken" to
reveal the desired copy.
The updated data in the copy source will be reflected to the copy destination volume after
completing the operation. After mirror is established, all writes are also duplicated.
Copy Source
Copy volumes as seen by the
server
Copy Destination
Logical copy
(*4)
Actual state of volumes in the
disk storage system
Mirror may be broken as and
when required.
*4: After mirror is established, all writes are also duplicated.
Also, for ETERNUS DX90, the following function is available.
● REC
EC among different devices on the site is called REC. REC is different from EC, EC performs
Advanced Copy within the same device, whereas REC copies data between different devices.
Advanced Copy between different devices is called Remote Advanced Copy. Remote
Advanced Copy can be used to replicate data for making backups and for testing. Note that
REC uses the same copy method as EC.
ETERNUS DX90
Copy source
ETERNUS DX90
FC-RA
FC-RA
FC-RA
FC-RA
Copy destination
REC is available when using an ETERNUS DX90.
Before using REC, change the FC host port mode to Remote Adapter (RA) using the
procedure described in "5.4.8 Modify Port Mode" (page 184).
140
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.4 Advanced Copy Management
By creating a REC connection to an off-site device using network lines, IP lines and fiber
optical lines, for data transfer, REC can be performed between remote locations. Remote
Advanced Copy between distant locations is called Extended Remote Advanced Copy. It can
be used as a data maintenance solution for disaster recovery.
ETERNUS DX90
Copy source
ETERNUS DX90
FC-RA
FC-RA
Copy destination
Network line
FC-RA
FC-RA
FC-IP Converter
FC-IP Converter
REC has two transmission modes, asynchronous transmission mode and synchronous
transmission mode. Which mode is selected should be based on the line type and the
influence on access to the transaction volumes:
- Synchronous transmission mode
The write completion signal for a write request by the server is only returned after the write
to the copy source and the copy write to the copy destination have both completed.
However, synchronizing the data copy with the copy source write guarantees the contents
of the copy source and copy destination at the time of completion.
This method has a significant effect on write accesses from the server, and so is only
recommended for device-to-device copies between sites where the communications lag is
small.
- Asynchronous transmission mode
Write completion signals to write requests from the server are returned as soon as the
write to the copy source has been done, without waiting for the data to be copied to the
copy destination.
Copying the data to the copy destination asynchronously with the write allows the copy to
be performed without affecting the write performance of the server/copy source pair.
This method is recommended for device-to-device copies between devices at remote
sites.
This method is used for remote disaster backups.
Asynchronous mode has two sub-modes, Stack mode and Consistency mode.
Which should be selected will depend on the pattern of usage. There is also a Through
mode that is used to finalize data transfer for the other two modes.
• Stack mode
Only updated block positions are recorded before returning the completion signal to the
server, so waiting-for-response effects on the server are small. Actual transfer of the
recorded blocks can be performed by an independent transfer engine.
This mode is mainly used for remote backup.
This mode can be used even when the available line bandwidth is small, but a large
amount of untransferred data can accumulate as a result.
141
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.4 Advanced Copy Management
• Consistency mode
This mode guarantees the sequential transmission of updates to the destination device
in the same order as the writes occurred. This is useful when mirroring databases and
copies of multiple connected areas.
This mode uses a part of the cache memory as a transfer buffer. The blocks being
copied are "saved" into a send buffer and then transferred to the receive buffer, from
which they are then "extracted".
When using the Concurrent Suspend function, the transfer mode does not need to be
changed to the Through mode.
• Through mode
This mode is not used for normal transfers, but rather to transfer all as-yetuntransferred data when stopping or suspending the Consistency mode or Stack mode.
● OPC (Background Copy method)
The OPC function logically copies all data from the copy source to the copy destination in the
same device, when the host requests the operation. The ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90
immediately returns an OPC completion response to the copy request. This function then
allows prompt access to both the original and copied data while the actual physical copying
proceeds in the background. Unlike EC, the updated data in the copy source will not be
reflected to the copy destination volume after completing the operation.
Copy Source
Copy volumes as seen by the
server
Copy Destination
Logical copy
Actual state of volumes in the
disk storage system
Background copy
142
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.4 Advanced Copy Management
The following functions relating to the OPC are also available.
● QuickOPC
Just as for OPC, QuickOPC copies all the data in the copy source volume at the initialphysical copy. After the initial-physical copy has completed, only updated data needs to be
copied hereafter. Because it reduces the copy volume and realizes high-speed backup,
QuickOPC is recommended for backing up a large-scale database.
Copy Source
Copy Destination
Logical copy
Copy volumes as seen by the
server
Only updated
data is copied
Actual state of volumes in the
disk storage system
Background copy
● SnapOPC+
SnapOPC+ manages data by allocating OPC data and sessions that form generations, and
copies updated data only to the latest generation.
SnapOPC+ manages generations of differences between updated data as modification
history. It enables copying to be performed with less physical capacity. Maximum number of
generations varies depending on the ETERNUS models and software.
SnapOPC+ is recommended for backing up less updated volumes such as the file server.
Copy Source
Copy volumes
as seen by the server
Copy Destination
Logical Copy
(*5)
Original data is copied
before being overwritten.
Actual state of
volumes in the
disk storage system
Up to 8 generations can
be copied.
*5: Original data is referenced when an uncopied area is read.
143
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.4 Advanced Copy Management
SnapOPC+ uses the unique volume (Snap Data Volume: SDV) as a copy destination.
Also, a setting pool area for SDV (Snap Data Pool Volume), to continue the copy session
even when the amount of update data exceeds the SDV capacity, is available.
- SDV (Snap Data Volume)
SDV is an area used as a copy destination for SnapOPC+.
Only one copy destination can be specified per SDV.
Refer to "5.3.1 Create Volume" (page 111) for detailed procedure to create SDV.
- SDP (Snap Data Pool)
SDP is a standby storage area to continue sessions even when the amount of update data
exceeds the SDV capacity. It enables the storage area to be supplied from SDP to SDV as
required. This continues the copy session even when the amount of update data exceeds
the SDV capacity.
Note that SDP is configured by a unique volume Snap Data Pool Volume (SDPV).
Creating SDPV enables SDP.
- SDPV (Snap Data Pool Volume)
SDPV is a unique volume for SDP.
Created SDPV is automatically added to the SDP.
- SDPE (Snap Data Pool Element)
SDPE is a unit of SDP that is managed in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90.
Once the copy destination SDV capacity runs out, SDPEs are supplied from SDP to SDV
and the storage area is automatically expanded. Supplied storage (SDPE) returns to SDP
after the copy session complete.
Note that SDPE capacity is fixed to 1GB.
Copy source
Copy destination
Seen by server to
have the same
capacity as the
original volume.
Logical copy
In actuality, only the
changes to original
data are copied and
kept.
SDP
SDV
SDPE
SDPE
SnapOPC+
Extra storage areas (SDPE)
are supplied as the available
SDV capacity for the copy
destination runs out.
SDPE supplied to the SDV are returned to the SDP
after the copy session has been deleted.(*6)
*6: After the ETERNUS SF AdvancedCopy Manager (ACM) completes the session instead of a user,
another SnapOPC+ copy session may be created.
The ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 returns the SDPE when accepting a SnapOPC+ session deletion request.
144
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.4 Advanced Copy Management
■ Preparations for the Advanced Copy function
This section describes how to prepare for using the Advanced Copy function and copy session
management.
● Advanced preparation
The following preparations are required when using Advanced Copy functions.
- License registration
Register a license for using the Advanced Copy function.
If a license is not registered, up to eight copy sessions can be performed.
When an Advanced Copy feature is purchased, refer to "5.4.3
Register Copy License" (page 155) to register the license.
- Copy destination volume creation
Create a physical volume according to the amount of updated data in the copy source volume.
When performing SnapOPC+, create SDV and SDP.
Refer to "5.3.1 Create Volume" (page 111) and "5.4.1 Setup Snap Data Pool" (page 146)
for details.
• The RAID configuration of the copy source and copy destination
can be different.
• The copy source and copy destination volume encryption status
must match.
- Copy table size setting
Set the copy table size depending on the capacity of the copy target volume.
Refer to "5.4.6 Modify Copy Table Size" (page 160).
- Copy priority setting
Specify the copy priority in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90.
Refer to "5.4.5 Modify EC/OPC Priority" (page 158).
When performing SnapOPC+, the following preparations are also required.
- Copy parameter setting
Specify the threshold to report the shortage of SDP volume capacity during the copy
operation.
Refer to "5.4.4 Modify Copy Parameters" (page 156).
When performing REC, the following preparations are also required.
- Port mode setting
Specify a threshold for notification when a shortage of SDP volume capacity occurs during
the copy operation.
Refer to "5.4.8 Modify Port Mode" (page 184).
- Copy path setting
Set the Copy path information between devices.
Refer to "5.4.7 Set Copy Path" (page 164).
- REC buffer setting
Set the transfer buffer setting when performing REC in asynchronous consistency mode.
Refer to "5.4.10 Modify REC Buffer" (page 188).
145
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.4 Advanced Copy Management
- REC multiplicity setting
Set the multiplicity used for performing REC. This setting is required when the connection
type in the [Set Copy Path] is "Remote".
Refer to "5.4.9 Modify REC Multiplicity" (page 186).
● Copy session management
After preparation for Advanced Copy is complete, create a copy session to start copying volumes. During operation, check the status of the copy sessions and delete unnecessary copy
sessions.
- Copy session creation
Create a copy session via Windows Volume Shadow Copy Service (VSS) / ETERNUS SF
AdvancedCopy Manager (ACM).
Note that GUI can create SnapOPC+ session only.
Refer to "5.4.2 Manage Copy Session" (page 152).
GUI cannot create copy sessions other than SnapOPC+ sessions. Create copy sessions
via VSS/ACM.
- Copy session check
Check the status of each copy session using the [Advanced Copy Status] screen. Refer to
"4.4 Advanced Copy Status" (page 61).
For REC sessions, checking copy path and buffer status are also available.
Refer to "4.5 Advanced Copy Path Status" (page 63) and "4.6 REC Buffer Status" (page
65).
- Copy session deletion
Delete unnecessary copy sessions.
Data in the copy destination volume loses its meaning (becomes undefined).
For SnapOPC+, SDPs used by the deleted copy sessions are released.
Refer to "5.4.2 Manage Copy Session" (page 152).
In principle, use GUI to delete copy sessions created in GUI.
Deleting copy sessions created by software other than GUI, such as
Windows Volume Shadow Copy Service (VSS) and ETERNUS SF
AdvancedCopy Manager (ACM), is not allowed. However, if deleting
from VSS/ACM cannot be performed, use GUI to delete copy sessions.
5.4.1
Setup Snap Data Pool
This section describes how to set a Snap Data Pool (SDP), the pool area for SDV.
Create SDPV
This function creates the SDPV in the registered RAID group.
When the SDPV creation process is completed, the SDPV will be formatted automatically.
The following conditions apply for SDPV creation.
● Condition of SDPV
The SDPV capacity must be 2TB or less
146
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.4 Advanced Copy Management
● Conditions of the RAID group to create SDPV
• The status of the RAID group must be "Available" or "Present"
• If volumes are created in the RAID group, the number of volumes in the RAID group must be
less than 128
• The free area for the RAID group must be equal or larger than 1GB
• The RAID group must not be blocked
• The RAID group must not be in the Logical Device Expansion process
● The maximum number of SDPVs that can be set
The maximum number of SDPVs for ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is shown below.
Device name
per RAID group
per device
ETERNUS DX60
128
512
ETERNUS DX80/DX90
128
1024
• If the encryption mode is disabled, encrypted SDPV cannot be created.
• The following functions cannot be used for SDPV:
- Host Affinity settings
- LUN mapping
- Volume Encryption
- LUN Concatenation
- RAID Migration
• This function cannot be used in the following conditions:
- No RAID groups are registered in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90
- When no SDPV is created in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90, and
the RAID group is in the following conditions:
• Only one RAID group is registered in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/
DX90, and Logical Device Expansion is in progress in the RAID
group
• The status of all the RAID groups is not "Available", or "Present"
- When no SDPV is created in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90, and
the maximum number of volumes for each model is already
registered.
147
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.4 Advanced Copy Management
• Unlike other volumes, SDPV cannot be created by "5.3.1 Create
Volume" (page 111) menu or deleted by "5.3.2 Delete Volume" (page
114) menu.
• While SDPV can be created in any level RAID group, it is recommended
that the same RAID group configuration be used for all SDPVs created.
• The maximum capacity of SDP is 32TB for ETERNUS DX60, and 64TB
for ETERNUS DX80/DX90.
• Allocated space (SDPE) to SDV from the SDPV is released in the
following conditions:
- When deleting the SnapOPC+ session:
If one SnapOPC+ session is deleted, all the SnapOPC+ sessions
started earlier than that session are also deleted. The space used in
the SDV for the stopped generation is released.
- When the SnapOPC+ session turns to "Error" status:
If one SnapOPC+ session status turns to Error, the status for all the
SnapOPC+ sessions started earlier than that session also change to
Error. The space used in the SDV for the generation in Error status is
released.
The procedure to create SDPV is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Setup Snap Data Pool] under the [Advanced Copy Management]
menu on the [Volume Settings] tab.
→ The [Setup Snap Data Pool] screen appears.
2
Click the [Create] button.
148
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.4 Advanced Copy Management
3
Select the target RAID group icon in the tree on the left of the screen or RAID
Group List where the SDPV is created.
→ The detailed information of the selected RAID group is displayed.
4
Specify the following items, and click the [Create] button.
• Volume Name
Specify the SDPV name. Between 1 and 16 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except
', (comma)' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be used.
• Type
The volume type (SDPV) is displayed.
• Capacity (GB)
Specify the SDPV capacity.
• Encryption
Select "Enable" or "Disable" the encryption mode for the new volume.
• Number of Volumes
When creating multiple volumes with the same type and capacity, enter the number of
volumes to be created.
Created volume name is "specified volume name + running number starting from 0".
149
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.4 Advanced Copy Management
→ A confirmation screen appears.
5
Click the [OK] button.
→ Snap Data Pool setting is started. The SDPV is created in the selected RAID group.
After SDPV is created, new volume is automatically formatted.
End of procedure
Delete SDPV
This function deletes the registered SDPV.
There are two methods for deletion: "Reserve Delete" and "Force Delete".
• Reserve Delete
If the target SDPV is being used, the SDPV is scheduled for deletion. SDPV that is scheduled
for deletion will be deleted after the Advanced Copy session completes (when the usage of
SDPV becomes "0").
• Force Delete
The selected SDPV is forcibly deleted even if the copy session is under progress. However,
SDPV that is scheduled for deletion cannot be deleted. Wait for the scheduled deletion to
occur.
Up to 128 SDPVs can be deleted at the same time.
150
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.4 Advanced Copy Management
The procedure to delete SDPV is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Setup Snap Data Pool] under the [Advanced Copy Management]
menu on the [Volume Settings] tab.
→ The [Setup Snap Data Pool] screen appears.
2
Select the target SDPV from the tree on the left of the screen or "SDPV List"
field, and click the [Reserve Delete] button or [Force Delete] button.
3
Click the [OK] button.
→ The selected SDPV is deleted.
End of procedure
151
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.4 Advanced Copy Management
5.4.2
Manage Copy Session
The [Manage Copy Session] function creates and deletes the Advanced Copy session.
Only the SnapOPC+ copy sessions can be created using GUI.
For creating EC, REC, OPC, QuickOPC sessions, use copy management
software for the server.
Create Copy Session
The procedure to create copy session is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Manage Copy Session] under the [Advanced Copy Management]
menu on the [Volume Settings] tab.
→ The [Manage Copy Session] screen appears.
The Advanced Copy session list is displayed.
2
Click the [Start New Session] button.
152
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.4 Advanced Copy Management
3
Select the copy source volume and copy destination volume, and click the [Start
New SnapOPC+ Session] button.
→ A confirmation screen appears.
4
Click the [OK] button.
→ The created Advanced Copy session is started.
End of procedure
Delete Copy Session
The procedure to delete copy session is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Manage Copy Session] under the [Advanced Copy Management]
menu on the [Volume Settings] tab.
→ The [Manage Copy Session] screen appears.
The list of Advanced Copy session registered in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is
displayed.
153
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.4 Advanced Copy Management
2
Select the copy session to be deleted from the "Advanced Copy Session List",
and click the [Stop Session] button.
→ A confirmation screen appears.
3
Click the [OK] button.
→ The selected Advanced Copy session is deleted.
End of procedure
154
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.4 Advanced Copy Management
5.4.3
Register Copy License
The [Register Copy License] function is used to register an Advanced Copy license.
The procedure to register a copy license is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Register Copy License] under the [Advanced Copy Management]
menu on the [Volume Settings] tab.
→ The [Register Copy License] screen appears.
2
Input the license key, and click the [Register Copy License] button.
→ A confirmation screen appears.
3
Click the [OK] button.
→ The Advanced Copy License is registered.
End of procedure
155
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.4 Advanced Copy Management
5.4.4
Modify Copy Parameters
The [Modify Copy Parameters] function sets the parameters to enable automatic reporting and
processing when a SDP capacity shortage occurs during the SnapOPC+ operation.
If the copy source data exceeds the physical capacity of copy destination (and when the free
SDP does not exist), an error occurs in the relevant copy session and other older copy sessions.
This function prevents stopping copy session when the capacity shortage occurs.
There are two methods for notification; E-mail and SNMP Trap. ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90
reports the notification using the method specified in the [Setup Event Notification] screen. Select
whether to notify when a SDP capacity shortage occurs. When notifying, select the notification
method in advance.
The procedure to modify copy parameters is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Modify Copy Parameters] under the [Advanced Copy Management]
menu on the [Volume Settings] tab.
→ The [Modify Copy Parameters] screen appears.
2
Specify the following items, and click the [Set] button.
Select the threshold for SDP usage ratio.
The magnitude relation for each value must be in the following order:
Threshold for Policy Level 1 < Threshold for Policy Level 2 < Threshold for Policy Level 3
• Policy Level 1 (Informational) of Snap Data Pool
- Threshold (%)
Specify the usage ratio of SDP between 1 and 97.
If the copy source data exceeds the specified value, the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/
DX90 notifies that effect.
• Policy Level 2 (Warning) of Snap Data Pool
- Threshold (%)
Specify the usage ratio of SDP between 2 and 98.
If the copy source data exceeds the specified value, the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/
DX90 notifies that effect.
• Policy Level 3 (Error) of Snap Data Pool
- Threshold (%)
Specify the usage ratio of SDP between 3 and 99.
If the copy source data exceeds the specified value, the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/
DX90 notifies that effect.
156
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.4 Advanced Copy Management
• When reporting automatically if the threshold is exceeded, set the
notification method using the method specified in the "6.4.7 Setup
Event Notification" (page 245) in advance.
• Notification of the shortage of SDP capacity is sent only once for
each policy level. Even if the threshold is satisfied again within the
24 hours from the first notification, the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/
DX90 does not report that effect. After 24 hours has passed, the
device sends a notification again.
• If the threshold for multiple policies is satisfied at the same time,
the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 notifies of the highest policy
level.
→ A confirmation screen appears.
3
Click the [OK] button.
→ The specified copy parameters are registered.
End of procedure
157
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.4 Advanced Copy Management
5.4.5
Modify EC/OPC Priority
The [Modify EC/OPC Priority] function is used to set the copy speed when using EC (EC and
REC(*1)) and OPC (OPC, QuickOPC, and SnapOPC+).
The EC/OPC speed is usually set in consideration of the host's I/O load and copy processing
load. The set speed of EC/OPC becomes effective when the next session starts.
Select the EC/OPC priority from the following:
• Automatic Priority
This mode changes the EC/OPC priority automatically in response to the operating load
status.
• High Priority
This mode operates by making maximum use of internal resources.
This mode greatly affects host access performance, thus should not be used during normal
operation. Use when the operation load is low.
• Low Priority
This is a mode in which the influence on host access is reduced to a minimum.
Set this mode when using EC and/or OPC during operation.
*1:
The REC priority is specified using the [Modify REC Multiplicity] function, however, setting values
specified here are available in the following conditions:
• When the connection type is "Direct"
• When the REC multiplicity is not specified
Refer to "5.4.7 Set Copy Path" (page 164) for connection type settings.
Refer to "5.4.9 Modify REC Multiplicity" (page 186) for REC multiplicity settings.
The procedure to modify EC/OPC priority is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Modify EC/OPC Priority] under the [Advanced Copy Management]
menu on the [Volume Settings] tab.
→ The [Modify EC/OPC Priority] screen appears.
158
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.4 Advanced Copy Management
2
Specify the following item, and click the [Set] button.
• EC/OPC Priority
Select the EC/OPC speed from "Automatic Priority", "High Priority", or "Low Priority".
→ A confirmation screen appears.
3
Click the [OK] button.
→ The selected EC/OPC priority is set.
End of procedure
159
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.4 Advanced Copy Management
5.4.6
Modify Copy Table Size
The [Modify Copy Table Size] function is used to set the control table size on the CM cache
memory installed in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90, which is used by the device firmware.
When an EC (EC or REC), or OPC (OPC, QuickOPC, or SnapOPC+) function is in use, this control table (hereafter: copy table) is used as the bitmap area that manages the progress of the
copy.
Changed settings will be effective when the next session is started.
• When the copy table size is equal to 0MB, copy functions cannot be
used. Note that the initial (factory default) copy table size setting is 0MB.
• Make sure to stop the copy session before reducing the copy table size.
• The copy session status can be checked from the [Advanced Copy
Status] screen on the [Status] tab.
Copy table size (table size) and resolution vary according to the copy capacity and number of
sessions that are operated at the same time.
(1) Resolution
This value determines the amount of data each bit in the copy bitmap represents.
The allowed resolution settings of "1 (standard)", "2", "4", "8", and "16" respectively give
8KB, 16KB, 32KB, 64KB, and 128KB regions of data per bitmap bit. The same value is
used for all the copy sessions in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90.
The resolution should be set as small as possible to reduce the internal process overhead.
Set "1" if possible.
(2) Copy Table Size
A dedicated memory area is required for Advanced Copy management and is allocated as
a table size.
The table size and resolution settings are determined by the copy capacity and the
number of sessions (volumes) that will be run simultaneously. The following shows the
table sizing formula.
S (Table size) [MB] =
S1 (EC/REC table size) [MB]
+ S2 (OPC table size without OPC Restoration) [MB]
+ S3 (OPC table size with OPC Restoration) [MB]
+ S4 (QuickOPC table size without OPC Restoration) [MB]
+ S5 (QuickOPC table size with OPC Restoration) [MB]
+ S6 (SnapOPC+ table size) [MB]
160
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.4 Advanced Copy Management
• Round the derived value up to the next multiple of 8 to obtain the correct
setting for the copy table size.
• A copy table of the appropriate size (as derived above) is created in
each controller (CM0/CM1).
• If the total table size value (S) exceeds the maximum size allowed,
adjust the resolution (M) upward until the maximum table size is no
longer exceeded. The resolution should be kept as small as possible.
• Maximum allowed table sizes are as follows:
ETERNUS DX60: 64MB
ETERNUS DX80/DX90: 128MB
• Allowance should be made for possible future increases in the copy
capacity when calculating the EC/OPC/QuickOPC/SnapOPC+ table
size.
• If the resolution is changed during an existing copy session, the table
sizing formula described in this section is not applied.
• The same bitmap ratio (M) value must be used by both the copy source
device and copy destination device. If the bitmap ratio settings for the
copy source and copy destination devices are different, REC cannot be
performed. Note that the table sizes (S) do not need to be identical.
When different recommended bitmap ratios are calculated for of the
copy source and copy destination devices, use whichever bitmap ratio is
larger for both devices, recalculating the table size setting for the device
whose original bitmap ratio was lower.
● EC/REC table size (S1)
M: Resolution
C1: EC/REC copy capacity [GB](*1)
N1: Number of EC/REC sessions
S1 [MB] = ((2 × C1 / M) + N1) × 8 [KB] / 1024 (counting fractions as one)
● OPC table size without OPC Restoration (S2)
M: Resolution
C2: Copy capacity for OPC where OPC is not used for OPC Restoration [GB](*1)
N2: Number of OPC sessions where OPC is not used for OPC Restoration
S2 [MB] = ((2 × C2 / M) + N2) × 8 [KB] / 1024 (counting fractions as one)
● OPC table size with OPC Restoration (S3)
M: Resolution
C3: Copy capacity for OPC where OPC is used for OPC Restoration [GB](*1)
N3: Number of OPC sessions where OPC is used for OPC Restoration
S3 [MB] = ((2 × C3 / M) + N3) × 2 × 8 [KB] / 1024 (counting fractions as one)
161
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.4 Advanced Copy Management
● QuickOPC table size without OPC Restoration (S4)
M: Resolution
C4: Copy capacity for QuickOPC where QuickOPC is not used for OPC Restoration [GB](*1)
N4: Number of QuickOPC sessions where QuickOPC is not used for OPC Restoration
S4 [MB] = ((2 × C4 / M) + N4) × 2 × 8 [KB] / 1024 (counting fractions as one)
● QuickOPC table size with OPC Restoration (S5)
M: Resolution
C5: Copy capacity for QuickOPC where QuickOPC is used for OPC Restoration [GB](*1)
N5: Number of QuickOPC sessions where QuickOPC is used for OPC Restoration
S5 [MB] = ((2 × C5 / M) + N5) × 3 × 8 [KB] / 1024 (counting fractions as one)
● SnapOPC+ table size (S6)
M: Resolution
C6: Copy capacity for SnapOPC+ [GB](*2)
N6: Number of SnapOPC+ sessions(*3)
S6 [MB] = ((2 × C6 / M) + N6) × 8 [KB] / 1024 (counting fractions as one)
*1:
For EC, OPC, QuickOPC, and REC copy sources, the copy capacity is the total capacity of all
volumes (slices or partitions) in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 that are defined as copy sources.
For REC copy destinations, the copy capacity is the total capacity of all the volumes (slices or partitions) in the ETERNUS DX90 that are defined as copy destinations.
For multi-copy sessions, the copy capacity is the total capacity of multi-copy source volumes (slices or
partitions), multiplied by the number of multi-copy destinations for each copy source.
[Example] Calculating capacity of multi-copy sessions:
Copy area in the copy source volume A: 200MB, Number of multi-copy destination: 4
Copy area in the copy source volume B: 500MB, Number of multi-copy destination: 8
B
A
200 × 4 + 500 × 8 = 4800MB.
Add this 4,800MB to the copy capacity C1, C2, or C4, depending on the copy type. (For EC and REC,
add the value to C1. For OPC, add the value to C2. For QuickOPC, add the value to C4.)
When using EC or REC, add the number of multi-copy sessions to obtain N1. When using OPC, add
the number of multi-copy sessions to obtain N2. When using QuickOPC, add the number of multi-copy
sessions to obtain N4. In this example, use 12 (= 4 + 8) for N1, N2, or N4, depending on the copy
type.
When using multi-copy and executing OPC Restoration from the copy destination, select one copy
destination and apply the above formula. (For QuickOPC, the QuickOPC destination should be used.)
Other copy destinations are calculated as for normal multi-copy.
162
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.4 Advanced Copy Management
*2:
For SnapOPC+, copy capacity indicates the total capacity of SnapOPC+ copy source volumes (slices
or partitions) × number of generations in a device.
[Example] Calculating capacity of SnapOPC+ sessions:
SnapOPC+ copy area in the copy source volume C: 200MB, Number of SnapOPC+ generations: 8
SnapOPC+ copy area in the copy source volume D: 500MB, Number of SnapOPC+ generations: 4
D
C
Capacity of SnapOPC+ copy source = 200 [MB] × 8 + 500 [MB] × 4 = 3600 [MB]
3600 [MB] derived above is the copy source capacity C6.
*3:
In the example above, use 12 (= 8 + 4) for N6, the number of SnapOPC+ sessions (total number of
generations).
The procedure to set the copy table size is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Modify Copy Table Size] under the [Advanced Copy Management]
menu on the [Volume Settings] tab.
→ The [Modify Copy Table Size] screen appears.
2
Specify the following items, and click the [Set] button.
• Advanced Copy feature enabled
Select whether to turn the Advanced Copy feature "On" or "Off".
• Copy Table Size
- Resolution
Select from "× 1", "× 2", "× 4", "× 8", or "× 16".
- Table Size (MB)
For ETERNUS DX60, select between 0 and 64 (MB). For ETERNUS DX80/DX90,
select between 0 and 128 (MB). (Unit: 8MB)
"Off" can be selected for the "Advanced Copy feature enabled" when
the copy table size is 0 (MB).
Stop the copy session before reducing the table size.
163
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.4 Advanced Copy Management
→ A confirmation screen appears.
3
Click the [OK] button.
→ The copy table size is set.
End of procedure
5.4.7
Set Copy Path
The [Set Copy Path] function creates copy path information used for REC on the wizard screen.
The copy path information for the local device and copy path information between different
devices can be set. Download the created path information to a PC and apply it to other devices.
This simplifies settings for the next devices.
The [Set Copy Path] provides the following functions:
(1) Register Device Information
Register the Box IDs for devices to create a copy path.
Registering two or more devices is required when creating a copy path.
Also, select a port to be used for creating the copy path for each device.
(2) Create Copy Path
Create copy path information between devices.
164
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.4 Advanced Copy Management
(3) Download
Download one of the following information sets in file format.
- Copy path information created in (2)
- Existing copy path information
- Device information
(4) Apply Copy Path
Apply the copy path information in the local device (*1)
(5) Measure Round Trip Time
Measures the round trip time between the local and remote devices.
Operation mode can be selected in the Start screen of the Set Copy Path wizard. Select and perform one of the functions described above.
• Register Device Information (Register)
• Create Copy Path (Create)
• Download (Download)
• Apply Copy Path (Apply)
• Measure Round Trip Time (Measure)
*1:
Copy path information of the local device can be deleted from the Apply Copy Path screen.
• This function is available when using an ETERNUS DX90.
• One source device can have copy paths set for a maximum of 16
destination devices.
• Up to eight copy paths can be created between a pair of remote and
local devices.
• Up to 32 ports can be connected from one port.
• Only the ETERNUS DX90 can be registered in "Register Device Information"
• Only files that are created in the ETERNUS DX90 or files that are converted to a format that supports the ETERNUS DX90 with other
ETERNUS DX Disk storage systems can be applied for the copy path
information in "Apply Copy Path". A copy path information file for which
the information on the local device does not exist cannot be applied to
the ETERNUS DX90. When the ETERNUS DX90 S2, ETERNUS
DX410 S2/DX440 S2, or ETERNUS DX8100 S2/DX8700 S2 is set as
the connection destination of the copy path, a copy path file that is created and converted using GUI for the ETERNUS DX90 S2, ETERNUS
DX410 S2/DX440 S2, or ETERNUS DX8100 S2/DX8700 S2 must be
applied.
165
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.4 Advanced Copy Management
The procedure for setting copy path is as follows:
Select Operation Mode
Select the operation mode.
Procedure
1
Click the [Set Copy Path] under the [Advanced Copy Management] menu on the
[Volume Settings] tab.
→ The [Copy Path Setting Wizard] screen appears in the [Set Copy Path] screen.
2
Select the operation mode, and click the [Next >] button.
•
•
•
•
•
Operation Mode Create Copy Path
Export Copy Path Information
Export Storage System Information
Apply Copy Path
Measure Round Trip Time
→ The screen that is displayed varies depending on the selected operation mode.
- When selecting "Operation Mode Create Copy Path"
The screen for selecting the copy path creation method appears. Proceed with the
procedure described in "Register Device Information".
- When selecting "Export Copy Path Information"
The screen for exporting the copy path information appears. Proceed with the procedure described in "Download".
- When selecting "Export Storage System Information"
The screen for exporting storage system information appears. Proceed with the procedure described in "Download".
- When selecting "Apply Copy Path"
The screen for applying the copy path appears. Proceed with the procedure
described in "Apply Copy Path".
166
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.4 Advanced Copy Management
- When selecting "Measure Round Trip Time"
The screen for measuring round trip time appears. Proceed with the procedure
described in "Measure Round Trip Time".
End of procedure
Register Device Information
Procedure
1
Specify the following items, and click the [Next >] button.
• Use of existing information
Select the following items when using existing device information.
- Use storage system(Backup File)
Use the backup file stored in the device system disk.
- Use file
The copy path information file is stored in the PC that it was created in using the
procedure described in "Create Copy Path" and exported using the procedure
described in "Download".
- Not use
• Add of device information
Select whether to add device information or not.
- Add
Select the addition method from "File", "Manual", or both of "File" and "Manual".
When selecting "File" or both "File" and "Manual", use the existing device information. Device information includes the device Box ID.
- Not add
→ The next screen varies depending on the selected item.
- When selecting "Use storage system(Backup File)"
A confirmation screen for registering device information appears. Proceed to Step 3.
- When selecting "Use file"
The Select Copy Path Information File screen appears. Proceed to Step 2.
167
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.4 Advanced Copy Management
- When selecting "Not use"
When selecting "File" or both "File" and "Manual" as the addition method, the
screen for selecting the device information file appears. Proceed to Step 7.
When selecting "Manual" for the addition method, the screen for inputting device
information appears. Proceed to Step 11.
2
Specify the copy path information file, and click the [Next >] button.
→ A confirmation screen for registering device information appears.
3
Select the Box ID for the device that will be registered, and click the [Next >] button.
→ A confirmation screen appears.
168
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.4 Advanced Copy Management
4
Click the [OK] button.
→ The specified contents are registered. The screen to select a port appears. Proceed to
Step 5.
However, if the target device is not selected in Step 3 (or the selected device does not
exist), the port selecting screen does not appear. The screen for selecting a device
information file appears instead. Proceed to Step 7.
5
Select the port to be used for each device, and click the [Next >] button.
Select the port in which the port mode is "RA".
→ A confirmation screen appears.
6
Click the [OK] button.
→ The specified contents are registered. The screen for selecting a device information file
appears.
169
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.4 Advanced Copy Management
7
Specify the following items, and click the [Next >] button.
• Select Operation Method
- Finish of Registration by File Reading
- Registration from File
• Select Device Information File
- Device information file
When selecting "Registration from File", specify the location where the device information file is stored.
→ The specified contents are registered.
When selecting "Registration from File", the execution screen for reading a device
information file appears. Then, the screen for selecting a port appears. Proceed to Step
8.
When selecting "Finish of Registration by File Reading", and "Manual" is selected for
the "Add of device information" field in Step 1, the screen for inputting device information appears. Proceed to Step 11. If "Manual" is not selected, a confirmation screen for
the device information appears. Proceed to Step 15.
170
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.4 Advanced Copy Management
8
Select the port to be used for each device, and click the [Next >] button.
Select the port in which the port mode is "RA".
→ A confirmation screen appears.
9
Click the [OK] button.
→ The specified contents are registered. Returns to the screen for selecting a device
information file.
10 Click the [Next >] button.
→ When "Manual" is selected for the "Add device information" field in Step 1, the screen
for inputting device information appears. Proceed to Step 11.
If "Manual" is not selected in Step 1, a confirmation screen for the device information
appears. Proceed to Step 15.
171
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.4 Advanced Copy Management
11 Specify the following items, and click the [Next >] button.
When "Manual" is selected, specify the Box ID and Unique Number.
• Select Operation Method
- Finish of Registration by File Reading
- Registration by Manual Operation
• Device Information Setting
- Box ID
Input the Box ID for the new device that will be registered using 40 characters.
Capital letters, numerals, symbols (’#’), and blanks can be used.
- Unique Number
Input a unique number for the new device that will be registered using 4 hexadecimal numbers.
Enter the value of the fifth and sixth bytes of the WWN.
[Example] When the WWN is 500000E0D04C5800: Enter "4C58"
→ The specified contents are registered. When selecting "Registration by Manual Operation", the screen for setting a port appears. Proceed to Step 12. If "Finish of
Registration by File Reading" is selected, a confirmation screen for device information
appears. Proceed to Step 15.
172
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.4 Advanced Copy Management
12 Select the port to be used for each device, and click the [Next >] button.
Select the port in which the port mode is "RA".
→ A confirmation screen appears.
13 Click the [OK] button.
→ A confirmation screen for device information appears.
14 Click the [Next >] button.
→ A confirmation screen appears.
173
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.4 Advanced Copy Management
15 Click the [Next >] button.
→ The specified contents are registered. The screen for selecting a device to create a
copy path appears. Proceed with the procedure described in "Create Copy Path".
End of procedure
Create Copy Path
Create copy path. Specify the Box ID for the device to create a copy path, and set line information and the copy path between the devices.
Procedure
1
Select the Box ID for the destination device connected to the source device to
create the copy path, and click the [Next >] button.
→ The screen for creating a copy path appears.
174
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.4 Advanced Copy Management
2
Specify the following items, and click the [Next >] button.
• Select Copy Path
- Set Line
• Connection Type
Select "Remote" or "Direct".
• Link Speed (Mbit/s)
When selecting "Remote" in the Connection Type field, specify the link speed
between 1 and 65535(Mbit/s).
• Compression Ratio (%)
When selecting "Remote" for the Connection Type field, specify the line
compression ratio between 0 and 99(%).
- Copy Path
Select the copy path between the copy source and destination devices.
→ Returns to the screen to select device creating copy path.
3
Create copy paths to all the destination devices for each source device.
Select the "Change Source Device" and click the [Next >] button to change the source
device.
175
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.4 Advanced Copy Management
4
After creating copy paths to all the destination devices, select the "Finish Path
Creating" and click the [Next >] button.
→ A confirmation screen for the copy path appears.
5
Click the [Next >] button.
→ The screen for downloading a file appears. Proceed with the procedure described in
"Download".
End of procedure
176
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.4 Advanced Copy Management
Download
Download the copy path information created with the procedure described in "Create Copy Path"
or existing copy path information.
By downloading the copy path information as a file, copy path information can be applied to the
local and other devices.
Procedure
1
Click the [Download] button.
• Download File screen (Create Path)
This screen is displayed when selecting "Create Copy Path" for "Operation Mode".
• Download File screen (Export Copy Path Information)
This screen is displayed when selecting "Export Copy Path Information" for "Operation
Mode".
177
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.4 Advanced Copy Management
• Download File screen (Export Storage System Information)
This screen is displayed when selecting "Export Storage System Information" for
"Operation Mode".
If no RA ports are defined in the ETERNUS DX90, downloading
information is not allowed (the [Download] button is not displayed).
2
Click the [Next >] button or [Finish] button.
When applying copy path information, click the [Next >] button. When finishing the settings, click the [End] button.
→ A confirmation screen or exit confirmation screen appears.
3
Click the [OK] button.
→ When clicking the [Next >] button in Step 2, the screen with the device connection list
appears. Proceed to "Apply Copy Path".
When clicking the [End] button in Step 2, the exit screen appears. Proceed to "Exit
Wizard".
End of procedure
Apply Copy Path
Apply or delete copy path information in the local device.
• When applying copy path information, the copy path currently registered
in the local device is deleted.
• If REC sessions exist in the local device, changing or deleting copy path
information in use affects copy operation.
• If deleting copy path when no path information exists between the local
and remote devices, all the copy path information in the local device will
be deleted.
178
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.4 Advanced Copy Management
Procedure
1
Select one of the following items, and click the [Next >] button.
• Copy Path Information
- Set path information
Specify the location of the copy path information file.
- Delete the path information of the device
This screen is not displayed when selecting "Create Copy Path" for
operation mode. The screen with the device connection list appears
instead. Proceed to Step 2.
→ When selecting "Set path information", the screen with the device connection list
appears. Proceed to Step 2. When selecting "Delete the path information of the
device", a confirmation screen appears. Proceed to Step 3.
179
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.4 Advanced Copy Management
2
Check the copy path in the device connection list and click the [Next >] button.
When the link for Remote Device Box ID is clicked, the screen for
confirming copy path information appears and the copy path information can be checked.
→ A confirmation screen appears.
180
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.4 Advanced Copy Management
3
Click the [OK] button.
- When selecting "Set path information"
→ A confirmation screen appears. Then the progress screen appears.
When selecting "Set path information", the screen for measuring round trip time
appears. Proceed with the procedure described in "Measure Round Trip Time".
However, if no remote device exists, the exit screen appears. Proceed with the
procedure described in "Exit Wizard".
When selecting "Delete the path information of the device", the exit screen appears
after completing the operation. Proceed with the procedure described in "Exit Wizard".
End of procedure
Measure Round Trip Time
Measure round trip time between the local and remote devices.
Destination devices in which the connection type is "Remote" can be target devices.
• The measured round trip time value is applied to the ETERNUS DX90.
Make sure to suspend the REC sessions in advance.
• When the communication environment between devices is changed,
measure the round trip time again.
• Measuring the round trip time may take a maximum of 160 seconds.
Procedure
1
Select the target device and click the [Next >] button.
→ A confirmation screen appears. Proceed to Step 2.
However, if no target device is selected, the exit screen appears. Proceed with the
procedure described in "Exit Wizard".
181
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.4 Advanced Copy Management
2
Click the [OK] button.
→ The execution screen appears. Then the progress screen appears.
After completing the process, the result screen for measuring round trip time appears.
3
Click the [Next >] button.
→ The exit screen appears. Proceed with the procedure described in "Exit Wizard".
End of procedure
182
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.4 Advanced Copy Management
Exit Wizard
Close the wizard and finish the copy path settings.
Procedure
1
Click the [Close] button.
→ The wizard screen is closed. The copy path settings complete.
End of procedure
183
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.4 Advanced Copy Management
5.4.8
Modify Port Mode
The [Modify Port Mode] changes the port mode (Channel Adapter (CA) or Remote Adapter
(RA)).
• CA
Used for connecting to the host.
• RA
Used for performing REC.
• The [Modify Port Mode] function is available when using ETERNUS
DX90.
• When changing the port mode of a live port from "CA" to "RA", it is necessary to stop the host access connected to the CA Port to be changed.
To change the mode of a newly added port, it is not necessary to stop
host access.
• When changing the port mode of a live port from "RA" to "CA", it is necessary to check that there is no session in the RA Port to be changed. If
changing the port mode, specified copy path information in the target
port will be deleted.
• If changing the port mode from "CA" to "RA", LUN mapping information
in the target CA port will be deleted.
• If changing the port mode from "RA" to "CA", specified copy path information in the target RA port will be deleted.
The procedure to modify port mode is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Modify Port Mode] under the [Advanced Copy Management] menu on
the [Volume Settings] tab.
→ The [Modify Port Mode] screen appears.
184
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.4 Advanced Copy Management
2
Specify the "Port Mode (After)", and click the [Set] button.
→ A confirmation screen appears.
3
Click the [OK] button.
→ The port mode is set.
End of procedure
185
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.4 Advanced Copy Management
5.4.9
Modify REC Multiplicity
The [Modify REC Multiplicity] function sets the REC multiplicity.
REC multiplicity is the line speed parameter for each copy path.
By specifying the appropriate multiplicity, the device controls the I/O of the line being used for
remote connection, and uses lines efficiently.
• This function is available when using ETERNUS DX90.
• Normally, do not change REC multiplicity and make sure to use the
default ("Auto") setting.
• If no destination device information is registered, this function is not
available.
• Each line device may not perform with the REC multiplicity specified
with this function. Setting values are used as information for using a line
efficiently.
• Suspend the session status between the devices in the following conditions. In other cases, there is no need to suspend the copy session.
- When changing the connection method ("Direct" or "Remote")
- When measuring round trip time again
• The REC multiplicity can be specified when selecting "Remote" for the
specification mode in "5.4.7 Set Copy Path" (page 164).
• In the following conditions, EC/OPC priorities specified in "5.4.5 Modify
EC/OPC Priority" (page 158) is used instead of REC multiplicity:
- When the connection method is "Direct"
- When no REC multiplicity is set
• Specified REC multiplicity is enabled immediately
The procedure to set REC multiplicity is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Modify REC Multiplicity] under the [Advanced Copy Management]
menu on the [Volume Settings] tab.
→ The [Modify REC Multiplicity] screen appears.
186
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.4 Advanced Copy Management
2
Specify the following items, and click the [Set] button.
• Specification Mode
- Manual
Specify REC multiplicity.
- Auto
Use the recommended multiplicity that is automatically calculated from the device.
• Multiplicity
When selecting "Manual" for the specification mode, specify the REC multiplicity
between 1 and 256 using numeral characters.
When the round trip time is not obtained, "***" is displayed. To display the recommended multiplicity, obtaining round trip time using
the [Set Copy Path] function is required.
3
Click the [OK] button.
→ The REC multiplicity is set.
End of procedure
187
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.4 Advanced Copy Management
5.4.10
Modify REC Buffer
The [Modify REC Buffer] function sets the transfer buffer for copying data via the REC buffer in
asynchronous Consistency mode.
Copy via REC buffer stores multiple REC session I/Os in the REC buffer for a certain period of
time, and copies them in blocks. This enables mirroring of whole database and securing copy
speed when performing REC between remote locations, several thousand kilometers away from
the source device.
Consistency mode stores data in the large capacity of REC transfer buffer for a certain period of
time, and copies them at one time. Note that one REC buffer cannot be used bi-directionally
(both of sending and receiving). When performing REC bi-directionally, also set the REC buffers
in the opposite direction.
REC buffer usage can also be checked using the ETERNUS SF AdvancedCopy Manager
(ACM).
• This function is available when using the ETERNUS DX90.
• REC buffer must be specified for both devices performing REC. Note
that one REC buffer is unidirectional. When transferring data bi-directionally, both of sending and receiving REC buffers must be specified in
the each device.
• Up to four REC buffers can be specified. A maximum of 512MB REC
buffers in total can be secured.
• When changing or deleting REC buffers, suspend the sessions using
the target REC buffers.
• When copying data via REC buffer, REC buffer settings are required in
both of copy source and copy destination devices. Make the REC buffer
size the same for the devices of the copy source and destination. The
size will be adjusted to whichever is smaller.
• If no destination device and/or copy path are set, REC buffer setting is
not available.
Refer to "5.4 Advanced Copy Management" (page 139) for details about
REC data transfer method and mode.
The procedure for setting REC buffer is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Modify REC Buffer] under the [Advanced Copy Management] menu on
the [Volume Settings] tab.
→ The [Modify REC Buffer] screen appears.
188
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.4 Advanced Copy Management
2
Specify the following items, and click the [Set] button.
• Usage
Select the usage of REC buffer from "Send" or "Receive".
If the REC buffer is not set, "Unused" is displayed.
When the target REC buffer is not used, select "Unused".
• Remote Box ID
Select the Box ID for the remote device.
A ’- (hyphen)’ is displayed when the usage of REC buffer is "Unused".
If the REC path information is deleted, "???" is displayed. Select
"Unused" for REC buffer usage or select a new remote Box ID.
• Size (MB)
Select the REC buffer size (MB) from the following:
- 128
- 256
- 512
REC buffer size is secured from the cache memory. When using
broadband connections or responding to temporary line transfer
delays, a larger REC buffer size is needed.
• Forwarding Interval (sec)
Select the forwarding interval (second) to transfer the data stored in the REC buffer to
the destination device from the following:
- 1
- 2
- 4
- 8
- 15
- 30
- 45
- 60
- 75
- 90
- 105
- 120
A long interval will reduce the Host I/O overhead, but increases
the amount of data susceptible to loss in the event of disaster.
189
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.4 Advanced Copy Management
• Monitoring Time (min)
Select from 0 to 15 (minutes) for the REC buffer monitoring time. The recommended
value is "5 (minutes)".
When the REC Buffer has large amounts of data to be stored and is in a high-load
state, the time required for I/O responses to the server delays for the specified time in
the "HALT Wait Timer" (from the server's viewpoint, the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90
seems to be delaying its response).
Once the delay state has continued for longer than the watch time setting (this item), all
REC Consistency mode sessions that are currently transferring data are HALTed to
allow priority processing of the server responses. If "0 (minutes)" is set, monitoring is
disabled.
• HALT Wait Timer (sec)
Select from 0 to 15 (seconds) for the HALT Wait Timer. Although the recommended
value is "15 (seconds)", select the appropriate value considering the effect on the system.
HALT Wait Timer is the maximum no-response time for which host I/O responses may
be delayed in order to prioritize data transfers from the REC Buffer when it is in a highload state.
When the set time is exceeded, responses for the Host I/O is restarted, but the REC
session is automatically HALTed. If "0 (seconds)" is set, the Host I/O always takes priority when this occurs and the copy session is HALTed immediately.
→ A confirmation screen appears.
An error screen appears in the following conditions:
• Clicking the [Set] button without changing any setting values
• When two or more REC buffers have the same usage and the
same remote Box ID
• The total size of four REC buffers exceeds 512MB
• Clicking the [Set] button when any of the remote Box ID is "???"
190
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 5 Configuration
5.4 Advanced Copy Management
Make sure to set the same REC buffer information (size, forwarding
interval, monitoring time, and HALT wait timer) for copy source and
copy destination devices.
3
Click the [OK] button.
→ The REC buffer is set.
End of procedure
191
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6
Global Settings
This chapter describes the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 global setting menu.
The global settings provides the following functions:
• User Management
• Network Settings
• Remote Support
• System Settings
• Host I/F Management
6.1
User Management
This section describes how to manage the user account.
● User Role
The available functions depend on the user role (privileges of the account) used to logon.
The following table provides the description for each user role.
6.1.1
User role
Available functions
Default account
Advanced
"Advanced" is a maintenance engineer privilege.
Functions such as status display, configuration
management, and maintenance functions are available.
f.ce
Standard
"Standard" is a system administrator privilege.
Functions such as status display and configuration
management are available.
root
Monitor
"Monitor" is a general user privilege.
Only the status display function is available.
None
Setup User Account
The [Setup User Account] function adds, edits, and deletes the user account.
• Up to 16 users including default accounts (f.ce and root) can be
registered.
• Default accounts (f.ce and root) can be edited or deleted.
• Entered letters are case-sensitive.
• The current user account (your account) can be changed or deleted.
When deleting a user account, at least one manager account (Standard
or Advanced) must remain. The changed or deleted setting will be available from next logon.
192
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.1 User Management
The procedure to add a new user is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Setup User Account] under the [User Management] menu on the
[Global Settings] tab.
→ The [Setup User Account] screen appears.
2
Click the [Add] button.
→ The "Add New User Account" field is displayed.
When editing or deleting the user account, select the target user
account from the "Registered user Account List" field, and click the
[Edit] or [Delete] button.
193
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.1 User Management
3
Specify the following items, and click the [Apply] button.
• User Name
Set the user name between 4 to 16 characters.
Alphanumeric characters and symbols ('! (exclamation mark)', '- (hyphen)', '_
(underscore)', and '. (period)') can be used.
• New Password
Set the password between 4 to 16 characters.
Alphanumeric characters and symbols ('! (exclamation mark)', '- (hyphen)', '_
(underscore)', and '. (period)') can be used.
• Confirm New Password
Input the same character strings as the value entered in the "New Password" field for
confirmation.
• User Role
Select the user role from "Advanced", "Standard", and "Monitor".
Select "Advanced" for the maintenance engineer account, select "Standard" for the
system administrator account, and select "Monitor" for a general user account.
Refer to "2.5 Operation Screens" (page 19) for available functions for each privilege.
• Account
Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the user account.
If the user account is disabled, that user account is registered but cannot be used.
• SSH Public Key
Register the SSH public key used for logon authentication from CLI. When registering
SSH public key, click the [Browse...] button to specify the public key.
• When registering a user account, an error occurs in the following
conditions.
- When the specified user name is already registered
- When the "User Name", "New Password", and/or "Confirm
New Password", are not entered
- When the password does not match the confirmation
password
- When the user name or password is less than 4, or more than
16 characters (If 17 or more characters are entered,
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 ignores the 17th and later
characters, and the password is registered using the first 16
characters only)
- When the user name or password includes characters other
than alphanumeric characters and symbols ('! (exclamation
mark)', '- (hyphen)', '_ (underscore)', and '. (period)')
• When using the SSH Client Key authentication, register the SSH
public key in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 and prepare the
SSH secret key, corresponding to the public key in the client PC
in advance.
• The following types (formats) of public keys can be used:
- RSA for SSH1 (OpenSSH)
- DSA for SSH2 (IETF) (*1)
- RSA for SSH2 (IETF)
*1:
Up to 1024 bits of SSH public key file can be registered.
194
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.1 User Management
→ A confirmation screen appears.
4
Click the [OK] button.
→ New user account is registered in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90.
End of procedure
6.1.2
Change User Password
The [Change User Password] function changes the current user's (your) password.
The procedure to change your password is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Change User Password] under the [User Management] menu on the
[Global Settings] tab.
→ The [Change User Password] screen appears.
195
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.1 User Management
2
Specify the following items, and click the [Change] button.
• User Name
Current user's (your) name is displayed.
• User Role
Current user's (your) user role is displayed.
• Old Password
Input the current password.
• New Password
Set the new password between 4 to 16 characters.
Alphanumeric characters and symbols ('! (exclamation mark)', '- (hyphen)', '_
(underscore)', and '. (period)') can be used.
• Confirm New Password
Input the same character strings as the value entered in the "New Password" field for
confirmation.
When changing a user password, an error occurs in the following
conditions.
• When the "Old Password" does not match the current password
• When the "New Password", "Confirm New Password", and/or
"Old Password" is not entered
• When the password does not match the confirmation password
• When the password is less than 4, or more than 16 characters (If
17 or more characters are entered, ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90
ignores the 17th and later characters, and the password is registered using the first 16 characters only)
• When the password includes characters other than alphanumeric
characters and symbols ('! (exclamation mark)', '- (hyphen)', '_
(underscore)', and '. (period)')
→ A confirmation screen appears.
196
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.1 User Management
3
Click the [OK] button.
→ The password is changed.
End of procedure
6.1.3
Initialize User Account
The [Initialize User Account] function initializes a registered user account. By using this function,
registered accounts are deleted and the default accounts (f.ce and root) revert back to factory
settings. Passwords for default accounts are also restored to default settings.
The procedure to initialize user account is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Initialize User Account] under the [User Management] menu on the
[Global Settings] tab.
→ The [Initialize User Account] screen appears.
2
Click the [Initialize] button.
→ A confirmation screen appears.
197
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.1 User Management
3
Click the [OK] button.
→ The user accounts are initialized.
End of procedure
198
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.2 Network Settings
6.2
Network Settings
6.2.1
Setup Network Environment
Set the environment for the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 to communicate with external hosts on
TCP/IP based network.
The IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, DNS server of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90,
and network address for the remote operation from outside of the subnet can be set.
Network environment setting is required for each MNT and RMT port.
• MNT port
MNT port is used for general communication between ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 and
external hosts.
• RMT port
RMT port is used for communication between ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 and Remote
Support center.
• If the IP address or the subnet mask for the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/
DX90 is changed, changing the network address (IP address or subnet
mask) of the FST may be required.
• If the IP address of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 becomes
uncertain, refer to "ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Disk storage system
User Guide" to initialize the IP address.
• After completing the setting, logon to GUI again.
The procedure to set the network environment is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Setup Network Environment] under the [Network Settings] menu on
the [Global Settings] tab.
→ The [Setup Network Environment] screen appears.
199
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.2 Network Settings
2
Specify the following items, and click the [Set] button.
• Select Network Port
Select the setting target port from "MNT" or "RMT".
• Interface
- Speed and Duplex
Select the communication speed and mode from the following.
• Auto Negotiation
• 1Gbit/s
• 100Mbit/s Half
• 100Mbit/s Full
• 10Mbit/s Half
• 10Mbit/s Full
- Master CM IP Address
Set the IP address (0 to 255) for the Master CM (required).
- Slave CM IP Address
Set the IP address (0 to 255) for the Slave CM.
Specify this value when duplicating the LAN path.
When the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 has only one CM, a Slave IP
address cannot be specified.
- Subnet Mask
Set the subnet mask (0 to 255) for the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Disk storage
system (required).
- Default Gateway
Set the IP address for the default gateway (0 to 255).
- Primary DNS
Set the IP address for the Primary DNS server (0 to 255).
- Secondary DNS
Set the IP address for the Secondary DNS server (0 to 255).
- http
Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the http connection.
This connection is used when accessing from GUI.
- https
Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the https connection.
This connection is used when accessing from GUI.
- telnet
Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the telnet connection.
This connection is used when accessing from CLI.
- SSH
Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the SSH connection.
This connection is used when accessing from CLI.
- Maintenance
Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the Maintenance connection.
This connection is used when accessing from the monitoring software.
200
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.2 Network Settings
- Maintenance-Secure
Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the Maintenance-Secure connection.
This connection is used when accessing from the monitoring software. This connection uses the data encryption for data transferring.
- ICMP
Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the ICMP connection.
This connection is used when transferring ping command from PC.
• Allowed IP List
The value entered in this field is enabled when the default gateway has been set.
Set the destination network address (IP address and subnet mask).
Up to 16 addresses can be set. Make sure to set the IP address and subnet mask in
pairs.
• Note the following when specifying the IP address and subnet
mask.
- Specify the IP address using IPv4 notation (character string in
d.d.d.d format based on the 256 radix system).
- RMT port is used when it is required to use the dedicated
network for Remote Support. IP addresses for the RMT port
and MNT port must be in different subnets.
- "Slave CM IP Address" is specified when connecting to the
Slave CM. IP addresses for the Slave CM and Master CM
must be in the same subnet.
- Specify the IP address of "Default Gateway" when allowing
access from outside of the subnetwork. The IP address must
be in the same subnetwork as the port.
- For "Allowed IP List", specify the IP address or network
address of an ETERNUS DX Disk storage system to allow the
ETERNUS DX Disk storage system to connect to the
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. These settings are not required
when connecting the ETERNUS DX Disk storage system that
belongs to the same network address (same sub-network) as
the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90.
• If ports of all the protocols are disabled, access to the device is
not allowed. When access to the device is not allowed, refer to
"ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Disk storage systems User Guide"
to reset the settings.
For the two CMs in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90, the CM that
has the priority to manage the device is called the Master CM, and
the other is called the Slave CM. If a CM or LAN failure occurs,
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 changes the Master CM automatically.
The IP address for prior Master CM is taken over to the new Master
CM. Specifying an IP address for the Slave CM enables forcible
changing of the Master CM. When an error occurs and access to the
Master CM is disabled, users can access the Slave CM and change
the Master CM.
201
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.2 Network Settings
→ A confirmation screen appears.
3
Click the [OK] button.
→ The network environment is set.
Device setting operation cannot be continued if the IP address is
changed. Logon again with the new IP address is required.
End of procedure
202
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.2 Network Settings
6.2.2
Setup SNMP Agent
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is a standard protocol used by the network management of TCP/IP. This standard protocol is used to monitor the equipment connected with the
network, via the network.
SNMP is comprised of a monitoring part (SNMP Manager) and a monitored part (SNMP Agent).
Information to be transferred with SNMP is defined in the Management Information Base (MIB), a
database installed in the SNMP Agent. The equipment that configures the network is managed
by transferring parameters between the SNMP Manager and SNMP Agent.
SNMP uses the following five commands to request, respond to, and provide the management
information between SNMP Manager and SNMP Agent.
When an ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 uses the SNMP Agent
environment, it is necessary to install software in the SNMP Manager.
The procedure to set an SNMP Agent is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Setup SNMP Agent] under the [Network Settings] menu on the [Global
Settings] tab.
→ The [Setup SNMP Agent] screen appears.
2
Specify the following items.
Click the link on the left of the screen to display the setting fields for each item.
• When the entry, numbers, or characters of setting items are
wrong, an error screen appears.
• Capital letters and lower case letters distinguish entered letters.
• One blank in the "Community Name" field represents two
characters.
203
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.2 Network Settings
• Basic Interface
Specify the following items:
- SNMP Function
Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the SNMP function.
- LAN Port used for SNMP
When "Enable" is selected for "SNMP Function", select "MNT" or "RMT".
- Authentication Failure
When "Enable" is selected for "SNMP Function", select "Send SNMP Trap" or "Do
not send SNMP Trap" for when authentication fails.
- Abnormal parts during maintenance
When reflecting an error status during maintenance, set "Notification". When not
reflecting, set "Not notification".
204
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.2 Network Settings
• Community Name
Community is a range of available networks for SNMP. The setting value is used as the
password for SNMP Manager to access the SNMP Agent. The SNMP Agent accepts
the request from the SNMP Manager when the SNMP Manager reports the same
Community as the SNMP Agent's Community.
The "Read Only" access privileges is added for the specified Community. Community
with other access privileges cannot be specified.
If no Community is specified, [public] is used as default.
The following procedure describes how to set a new Community.
Specify the following items, and click the [Add New Community] button.
- Community Name
Specify the Community name to which to transfer the trap. Between 1 and 50
alphanumeric characters, symbols ('!', '#', '$', '% (except for the first letter)', '&', '_
(underscore)', '+', '- (hyphen)', '*', and '/'), and blanks can be used (required).
- IP Address
Specify the IP address for the SNMP Manager. When "0.0.0.0" is specified, all hosts
are accepted.
- MIB View Setting
Specify the MIB View name accessed by this Community (may be omitted, which
will allow access to all Objects).
When the SNMP server is in different subnetwork where the
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 belongs, setting network address
in the "Allowed IP List" described in the "6.2.1 Setup Network
Environment" (page 199) is required.
The new Community is added in the "Set Community Name" field.
205
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.2 Network Settings
• MIB View Setting
MIB View is used for defining the accessible area in the Management Information Base
(MIB) database, with a tree type structure. Use this function to release only the part of
the information in the MIB.
The following procedure describes how to set new MIB View.
Specify the following items, and click the [Add New MIB View] button.
- View Name
Enter the MIB View Object ID within 60 numerals (including '.') (required).
- Subtree
Enter the Object ID for the subtree within 60 numerals (including '.'). A maximum of
15 subtrees can be specified at the same time.
The new MIB View is added in the "Set MIB View" field.
206
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.2 Network Settings
• Trap
Trap is used to report the error contents to the SNMP Manager immediately when a
device error occurs.
The following procedure describes how to set new destination of SNMP Trap.
Specify the following items, and click the [Add New Destination] button.
- IP Address
Specify the IP address for the transfer destination of the Trap (required).
- Community Name
Specify the Community name to which to transfer the trap. Between 1 and 50
alphanumeric characters, symbols ('!', '#', '$', '% (except for the first letter)', '&', '_
(underscore)', '+', '- (hyphen)', '*', and '/'), and blanks can be used (required).
The new destination of SNMP Trap is added in the "Set Destination of SNMP Traps"
field.
3
Click the [Set] button.
→ A confirmation screen appears.
4
Click the [OK] button.
→ The SNMP Agent is set.
End of procedure
207
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.2 Network Settings
6.2.3
Download MIB File
The [Download MIB File] function exports the MIB definition file registered in the ETERNUS
DX60/DX80/DX90.
Management Information Base (MIB) is the information for Manager to manage Agent with Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP). This information is a database with a tree type structure.
The MIB definition file is used for the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 SNMP environment settings,
and for allowing other applications that use SNMP (SNMP Manager) to handle the ETERNUS
DX60/DX80/DX90 (SNMP Agent).
This function is necessary when the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 uses the
SNMP Agent environment.
The procedure to download MIB definition file is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Download MIB File] under the [Network Settings] menu on the [Global
Settings] tab.
→ The [Download MIB File] screen appears.
2
Specify the following item, and click the [Download] button.
• Option
Select the "The ServerView control code is added to the comment line of the MIB
definition file" checkbox when downloading MIB file used for device monitoring by
ServerView.
→ A confirmation screen appears.
208
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.2 Network Settings
3
Click the [OK] button.
→ The MIB definition file is downloaded. A screen to save the downloaded MIB definition
file appears.
4
Save the downloaded file.
→ The MIB definition file is saved.
End of procedure
6.2.4
Perform SNMP Trap Test
The [Perform SNMP Trap Test] function transmits the test trap from the SNMP Agent to the
SNMP Manager.
The SNMP trap is the event information reported by the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 (SNMP
Agent) that contains the storage system status information.
Perform SNMP Agent and SNMP Manager settings before executing this test.
Perform "6.2.1 Setup Network Environment" (page 199) and "6.2.2 Setup
SNMP Agent" (page 203) before using this function.
This function transmits a test trap.
The procedure to perform SNMP trap test is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Perform SNMP Trap Test] under the [Network Settings] menu on the
[Global Settings] tab.
→ The [Perform SNMP Trap Test] screen appears.
209
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.2 Network Settings
2
Click the [Send] button.
→ A confirmation screen appears.
3
Click the [OK] button.
→ The SNMP trap test is performed.
End of procedure
Confirm that the trap can be normally received in the SNMP Manager after
the SNMP Trap test.
6.2.5
Setup E-Mail Notification
The [Setup E-Mail Notification] function configures the E-mail Notification settings for the various
events detected by the storage system.
If an error occurs in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90, the E-Mail of error information is sent to
the specified address.
Refer to "6.4.7 Setup Event Notification" (page 245) for detailed contents of the event.
210
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.2 Network Settings
Once an E-Mail address is specified, the address cannot be deleted (the
address can be changed).
When stopping the event notification via E-Mail, perform one of the following procedures.
• Disable the "Notification E-Mail"
• Clear the E-Mail checkbox of the notification method in the [Setup Event
Notification] function
The procedure to set the E-mail notification is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Setup E-Mail Notification] under the [Network Settings] menu on the
[Global Settings] tab.
→ The [Setup E-Mail Notification] screen appears.
2
Specify the following items.
Click the link on the left of the screen to display the setting fields for each item.
• Notification E-Mail
- Notification E-Mail
Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the E-Mail send function.
- Destination E-Mail Address
Specify the E-Mail destination address. Up to five addresses can be registered.
- Comment
Input the message (comment) to be added to the E-Mail.
Up to 255 alphanumeric characters, symbols, and blanks within 10 lines can be
used.
211
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.2 Network Settings
Click the [Send Test E-Mail] button to confirm that an E-Mail can be
sent to the specified address. When sending a test E-Mail, select
"Enable" for the "Notification E-Mail" setting. Note that clicking [Set]
button is required when changing the parameters before sending a
test E-Mail to enable the new settings.
• Mail Server Settings
- LAN Port used for SMTP Connection
Select the LAN port connecting to the SMTP server from "MNT" or "RMT".
- Sender E-Mail Address
Input the mail sender E-Mail address.
- SMTP Server
Specify the IP address or domain name of the SMTP server to be used.
- SMTP Port No.
Input the port number used by the SMTP server.
- SMTP requires authentication
Select the user authorization method to connect to the SMTP server from "None" or
"AUTH SMTP".
- User Name
If "AUTH SMTP" is selected for "SMTP requires authentication", input the sender
user name.
- Password
If "AUTH SMTP" is selected for "SMTP requires authentication", input the sender
password.
- Authentication Method
If "AUTH SMTP" is selected for "SMTP requires authentication", select the
authentication method from "Automatic", "CRAM-MD5", "PLAIN", or "LOGIN".
212
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.2 Network Settings
• Retry Setting
- Maximum Retries
Input the maximum number of retry ("0" or "1").
- Retry Interval (sec.)
Specify the interval between retry (0 to 5) in units of seconds.
3
Click the [Set] button.
→ A confirmation screen appears.
4
Click the [OK] button.
→ The specified send E-mail setting is registered.
End of procedure
6.2.6
Display SMTP Log
The [Display SMTP Log] function displays the SMTP log between the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/
DX90 and the server. If the E-Mail communication is not working normally, this function may
identify the cause of problem.
SMTP log contains request from the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 to the server and response
from the server to the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. Note that this function displays the SMTP
log for the latest event.
Perform "6.2.5 Setup E-Mail Notification" (page 210) in advance.
213
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.2 Network Settings
The procedure to display SMTP log is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Display SMTP Log] under the [Network Settings] menu on the [Global
Settings] tab.
→ The [Display SMTP Log] screen appears.
2
Check the displayed "Event Type" and "Communication Log".
Click the [Refresh] button to obtain the latest information.
End of procedure
6.2.7
Renew SSL Certificate
The [Renew SSL Certificate] function renews the unique SSL certificate for secure communication.
The data transmitted in the network may be intercepted from a third party. This function creates
the SSL certificate again, and prevents the impersonation caused by SSL certificate theft.
The procedure to create SSL certificate is as follows:
• When renewing the SSL certificate, GUI cannot be used until the
renewal process has completed. Wait a few minutes before starting the
next operation.
• Re-install the web-site certificate in the web browser using the procedure described in "Appendix A Install Site Certificate" (page 302) as
required.
214
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.2 Network Settings
Procedure
1
Click the [Renew SSL Certificate] under the [Network Settings] menu on the
[Global Settings] tab.
→ The [Renew SSL Certificate] screen appears.
2
Click the [Create] button.
→ A confirmation screen appears.
3
Click the [OK] button.
→ The SSL certificate is created.
End of procedure
215
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.3 Remote Support
6.3
Remote Support
The [Remote Support] setting menu registers user information related to the ETERNUS DX60/
DX80/DX90, and settings for Remote support function to REMCS (REMote Customer Support
system) center and the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90.
REMCS, a unique remote maintenance system by Fujitsu, provides the following maintenance
functions.
• Failure Notice
This function reports various failures that occur in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 to the
REMCS center. The maintenance engineer is notified of a failure immediately.
• Information Transfer
This function sends information such as logs and configuration information to be used when
checking a failure. It reduces time required to collect information for the REMCS center.
6.3.1
Display Support Information
The [Display Support Information] function checks the Remote Support function settings and
operation status.
The procedure to check the display support information is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Display Support Information] under the [Remote Support] menu on the
[Global Settings] tab.
→ The [Display Support Information] screen appears.
2
Check the displayed "Support Information" and "Event Information".
216
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.3 Remote Support
Click the [Refresh] button to obtain the latest information.
End of procedure
6.3.2
Display Communication Log
This function displays the communication log when the Remote Support function is operated
between the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 and the server. When the Remote Support function
cannot be operated properly, for example, cannot be connected to the REMCS center, use this
log to identify the cause of the problem.
The communication log includes requests from the device to the server, and responses from the
server to the device. Only the communication log of the last executed event is displayed.
Setting the server connection in advance is necessary.
The procedure to display the communication log is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Display Communication Log] under the [Remote Support] menu on the
[Global Settings] tab.
→ The [Display Communication Log] screen appears.
2
Check the displayed "Event Type" and the "Communication Log".
217
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.3 Remote Support
Click the [Refresh] button to obtain the latest information.
End of procedure
6.3.3
Setup Remote Support
The [Setup Remote Support] function registers the customer information and communication
environment information required to be given to Remote Support from the REMCS center.
• When changing the registered information, use the descriptions in "6.3.4
Update Customer Information" (page 226) and "6.3.5 Update
Communication Environment Information" (page 228).
• The Remote Support setting information file (customer information file
and communication environment information file) created by using
REMCS Environment Setup Assist Tool (REMCS ESAT) can be
imported to the device, to simplify the input operation required to be set
for each device.
The procedure to set the Remote Support is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Setup Remote Support] under the [Remote Support] menu on the
[Global Settings] tab.
→ The [Setup Remote Support] screen appears.
2
Specify the following items.
When importing Remote Support settings to the ETERNUS DX60/
DX80/DX90 all at once, click the [Browse...] button to specify the
location where the settings file has been stored, and click the
[Import] button.
• Customer Information
Customer information saved in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 can be deleted after
transmitting the information to the REMCS center. Select the "Delete any Customer
Identity information from the storage system after the information is sent to the
"REMCS Center"." checkbox to delete the information.
- Detailed Settings
• Company Name
Input the company name that owns ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 (required).
Up to 60 alphanumeric characters can be used.
• Department/Division
Input the department or division that owns ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90.
Up to 40 alphanumeric characters can be used.
218
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.3 Remote Support
• Address
Input the address of the company that owns ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90
(required).
Up to 60 alphanumeric characters can be used.
• Building Name
Input the building name where the company that owns ETERNUS DX60/DX80/
DX90 is located.
Up to 40 alphanumeric characters can be used.
• Administrator Name
Input the system administrator's name that manages the ETERNUS DX60/
DX80/DX90 (required).
Up to 40 alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used.
• Administrator E-Mail Address
Input the E-mail address of the system administrator who manages the
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 (required).
Up to 40 alphanumeric characters (including symbols) can be used.
• Postal Code (Zip Code)
Input the post code for the company that owns ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90.
Up to 10 alphanumeric characters (including symbols) can be used.
• Phone Number
Input the phone number for the company that owns ETERNUS DX60/DX80/
DX90 (required).
Up to 20 alphanumeric characters (including symbols) can be used.
• FAX Number
Input the FAX number for the company that owns ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90.
Up to 20 alphanumeric characters (including symbols) can be used.
• Storage System Unique Name
Input the nickname for the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90.
Up to 32 alphanumeric characters (including symbols) can be used.
• Country of Installation (ISO3166 A2) Example: JP, US, DE, etc.
Input the country code for the country where the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is
located (required).
Capital letters or 99 can be entered.
- Installation Location
• Address
Input the address where the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 locates.
Up to 60 alphanumeric characters can be used.
• Building Name
Input the building name where the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is located.
Up to 40 alphanumeric characters can be used.
- Information filled by Field Engineers
• Installation Date
Input the date when the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is installed.
Numerals can be used.
• Field Engineer E-Mail Address
Input the mail address for the field engineer who installed the ETERNUS DX60/
DX80/DX90.
Up to 60 alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used.
• Customer Code
Input the customer code.
Up to 8 numerals (including symbols) can be used.
219
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.3 Remote Support
• Communication Environment Information
- Connection
• Connection Type
Select the connection method when using the REMCS operation.
- Internet Connection
- Internet Connection (Mail only)
- P-P Connection
- P-P Connection (Mail only)
- P-P Connection (VPN Connection)
- P-P Connection (VPN Connection Mail only)
• LAN Port used for Remote Support
Select the device LAN port used for REMCS operation from "MNT" or "RMT".
- Service
• Scheduled Connection Time
Input the time for scheduled REMCS connection (required).
Numerals can be used.
• Scheduled Connection Period
Select the term for scheduled REMCS connection (required).
- Every Day
- Every Day (except Sunday)
- Every Day (except Saturday and Sunday)
- Once per Week
• Specify the Day of the Week
When "Once per Week" is selected for "Scheduled Connection Period", select
the day of the week for scheduled REMCS connection.
- Sunday
- Monday
- Tuesday
- Wednesday
- Thursday
- Friday
- Saturday
- Proxy Server
• Proxy Server
Input the IP address or domain name for the proxy server used for REMCS
operation.
Up to 63 alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used.
• Port No.
Input the port number for the proxy server.
Numerals between 0 and 65535 can be used.
• User Name
Input the user name when using the proxy server.
Up to 31 ASCII codes (alphanumeric characters and symbols) can be used.
• Password
Input the password for when using the proxy server.
Up to 31 ASCII codes (alphanumeric characters and symbols) can be used.
220
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.3 Remote Support
- Storage System E-Mail Configuration
• SMTP Server
Input the IP address or domain name for the SMTP server used for REMCS
operation (required).
Up to 63 alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used.
• Port No.
Input the port number for the SMTP server (required).
Numerals between 0 and 65535 can be used.
• Sender Mail Address
Input an address for mails sent by the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 for REMCS
operations (required).
Up to 63 alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used.
- SMTP Authentication Information
• Authentication Type
Select the SMTP authentication method.
- No SMTP Authentication
- POP Before SMTP Authentication
- AUTH SMTP Authentication
• Authentication Method
When the "Authentication Type" is "AUTH SMTP Authentication", specify the
Authentication Method.
- Automatic
- CRAM-MD5
- PLAIN
- LOGIN
• POP Server
When the "Authentication Type" is "POP Before SMTP Authentication", specify
the domain name or IP address for the POP server used for SMTP
Authentication.
Up to 63 alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used.
• Port No.
Input the port number for the POP server.
Numerals between 0 and 65535 can be used.
• User Name
Input the user name when using the POP server.
Up to 31 alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used.
• Password
Input the password when using the POP server.
Up to 31 alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used.
221
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.3 Remote Support
- REMCS Center
• REMCS Center
Select the REMCS center where the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is connected
(required).
- Fujitsu America
- Australia
- Brazil
- Hong-Kong
- China
- Indonesia
- Korea
- Malaysia
- Philippine
- Singapore
- Taiwan
- Thailand
- Vietnam
- Individual support in Hawaii
- OSC
- Direct Input Setting
• HTTP Server
If "Direct Input Setting" is selected for "REMCS Center" field, input the IP
address or domain name for the destination HTTP server.
Up to 63 alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used.
• Port No.
Input the port number for the HTTP server specified above.
Numerals between 0 and 65535 can be used.
• Receiver Mail Address
When "Direct Input Setting" is selected, input the E-mail address for the REMCS
center specified above as a report destination of the REMCS operation.
Up to 63 alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used.
• Detailed Configuration Information
- Mail Message Fragmentation Setting
Select whether to "Enable Message Fragmentation" or "Disable Message
Fragmentation" into the specified size.
If splitting the mail, specify the units in which to split the mail, between 64 and 6400
(KB).
- Specify Storage System Name for HELO/EHLO Announcement when Sending Mail
Select whether to "Specify" or "Do not specify" the storage system name for HELO/
EHLP announcement when sending mail. If "Specify" is selected, input the storage
system name. Up to 32 alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used.
222
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.3 Remote Support
• Time Information
This item is not required for setting.
If changing the setting values, select the "Change following Timing Parameter items"
checkbox.
- SMTP Response Timeout (sec.)
Input the timeout limit when using SMTP connection.
Numerals between 1 and 3600 can be used.
- SMTP Retry Count
Input the retry number of SMTP.
Numerals between 1 and 60 can be used.
- SMTP Retry Interval (sec.)
Input the intervals for retrying SMTP.
Numerals between 1 and 3600 can be used.
- HTTP Timeout (sec.)
Input the timeout limit when using HTTP connection.
Numerals between 1 and 3600 can be used.
- HTTP Retry Count
Input the retry number of HTTP.
Numerals between 1 and 60 can be used.
- HTTP Retry Interval (sec.)
Input the intervals for retrying HTTP.
Numerals between 1 and 3600 can be used.
- Queue Time before Sending Mails (msec.) (only when POP Before SMTP
authentication is enabled)
Input the waiting time for sending mail.
Numerals between 1 and 3600 can be used.
- [Setup Remote Support] screen (1/5)
223
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.3 Remote Support
- [Setup Remote Support] screen (2/5)
- [Setup Remote Support] screen (3/5)
224
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.3 Remote Support
- [Setup Remote Support] screen (4/5)
- [Setup Remote Support] screen (5/5)
225
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.3 Remote Support
3
Click the [Set] button.
→ A confirmation screen appears.
In the following conditions, an error screen appears.
• Click the [Set] button without setting the required item (items with
"*")
• Click the [Set] button with invalid values
• When the selected setting information file is not correct
• When file format of the selected setting information file is not
correct
4
Click the [OK] button.
→ The specified Remote Support setting is registered.
End of procedure
After completing the setting, the REMCS center sends the setting result to
the specified "Administrator E-Mail Address". Make sure to confirm the
settings.
6.3.4
Update Customer Information
The [Update Customer Information] function changes the customer information specified in
"6.3.3 Setup Remote Support" (page 218).
• Customer information saved in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 can be
deleted after transmitting the information to the REMCS center. Select
the "Delete any Customer Identity information from the storage system
after the information is sent to the "REMCS Center"." and then delete
personal information saved in device" checkbox to delete the
information.
• The Remote Support setting information file (customer information file)
created by using REMCS Environment Setup Assist Tool (REMCS
ESAT) can be imported to the device, to simplify the input operation
required to be set for each device.
226
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.3 Remote Support
The procedure to change the customer information is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Update Customer Information] under the [Remote Support] menu on
the [Global Settings] tab.
→ The [Update Customer Information] screen appears.
2
Set the customer information again.
When importing customer information to the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/
DX90 all at once, click the [Browse...] button to specify the location
where the settings file has been stored, and click the [Import] button.
- [Update Customer Information] screen (1/2)
- [Update Customer Information] screen (2/2)
227
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.3 Remote Support
3
Click the [Set] button.
→ A confirmation screen appears.
4
Click the [OK] button.
→ The customer information is changed.
End of procedure
6.3.5
Update Communication Environment Information
The [Update Communication Environment Information] function changes the communication
environment information specified in the "6.3.3 Setup Remote Support" (page 218).
The Remote Support setting information file (communication environment
information file) created by using REMCS Environment Setup Assist Tool
(REMCS ESAT) can be imported to the device, to simplify the input
operation required to be set for each device.
The procedure to update communication environment information is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Update Communication Environment Information] under the [Remote
Support] menu on the [Global Settings] tab.
→ The [Update Communication Environment Information] screen appears.
2
Set the communication environment information again.
When importing communication environment information to the
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 all at once, click the [Browse...] button
to specify the location where the settings file has been stored, and
click the [Import] button.
228
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.3 Remote Support
- [Update Communication Environment Information] screen (1/3)
- [Update Communication Environment Information] screen (2/3)
229
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.3 Remote Support
- [Update Communication Environment Information] screen (3/3)
3
Click the [Set] button.
→ A confirmation screen appears.
4
Click the [OK] button.
→ The communication environment information is changed.
End of procedure
6.3.6
Setup Log Sending Parameters
The [Setup Log Sending Parameters] function transfers the internal log to the REMCS center.
Select "Configure Automatic Log Transmission" or "Immediately Send Log Manually".
• Configure Automatic Log Transmission
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 sends the log automatically.
• Immediately Send Log Manually
Send log manually.
230
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.3 Remote Support
This function is not available in the following conditions:
• When "6.3.3 Setup Remote Support" (page 218) is not finished
• When a problem is detected in the Remote Support settings
• When the "Receiver Mail Address" (REMCS center) is not specified for
the Remote Support
• When the Remote support function is "Stopping" (refer to "6.3.7 Stop/
Restart Remote Support" (page 233))
The procedure to send log is as follows:
Configure Automatic Log Transmission
Procedure
1
Click the [Setup Log Sending Parameters] under the [Remote Support] menu on
the [Global Settings] tab.
→ The [Setup Log Sending Parameters] screen appears.
2
Click the [Configure Automatic Log Transmission] link on the left of the screen.
3
Specify the following items, and click the [Set] button.
• Send Log based on Events
To send logs automatically in the case of a failure, select the "Send" checkbox.
• Send Log Periodically
To send logs on regular basis.
Select the "Enable Periodical Transmission of Log." checkbox, and specify time,
period, and day of the week.
→ A confirmation screen appears.
231
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.3 Remote Support
4
Click the [OK] button.
→ The send log (Configure Automatic Log Transmission) is performed.
End of procedure
Immediately Send Log Manually
Procedure
1
Click the [Setup Log Sending Parameters] under the [Remote Support] menu on
the [Global Settings] tab.
→ The [Setup Log Sending Parameters] screen appears.
2
Click the [Immediately Send Log Manually] link on the left of the screen.
3
Specify the following items, and click the [Run] button.
• Incident Number
Specify the incident number of the manually sent log.
• Expander Log Collection
To obtain the Expander log, select the "Collect" checkbox.
• Time Range Specified
To specify the time to send log, select the "Specify" checkbox, and specify the start and
end time.
→ A confirmation screen appears.
232
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.3 Remote Support
4
Click the [OK] button.
→ The send log (Immediately Send Log Manually) operation is performed.
End of procedure
6.3.7
Stop/Restart Remote Support
The [Stop/Restart Remote Support] function stops or restarts the Remote Support.
This function is used for long time suspension such as relocating the system.
When suspending the Remote Support function, the device support status is changed from
"Operating" to "Stopping". When restarting the Remote Support function, the device support status is changed from "Stopping" to "Operating". When in the "Stopping", all Remote Support functions, such as automatic notification of device errors to the REMCS center, are stopped.
• Perform "6.3.3 Setup Remote Support" (page 218) in advance.
• This function is not available when the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is
in "Maintenance".
• The event of stopping or restarting the Remote Support function is
transferred from the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 to the REMCS
center.
The procedure to stop or restart the Remote Support is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Stop/Restart Remote Support] under the [Remote Support] menu on
the [Global Settings] tab.
→ The [Stop/Restart Remote Support] screen appears.
233
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.3 Remote Support
2
Click the [Stop] or [Restart] button.
→ A confirmation screen appears.
3
Click the [OK] button.
→ The stopping/restarting Remote Support is performed.
End of procedure
234
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.4 System Settings
6.4
System Settings
6.4.1
Modify Date and Time
The [Modify Date and Time] function is used to set the time/date and time zone (device location)
of the internal clock.
The clock is used for checking the internal log and Eco-mode, etc. of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/
DX90.
This function is used when moving the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 to a new installation site,
and/or changing the device date/time. The time zone setting is used for Remote Support function. It is possible to set the NTP server to automatically set the time. If an NTP function cannot
be used, resetting the time once a month is recommended.
• When using Eco-mode, make sure to set the time/date correctly.
If the time/date of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is wrong, processes
used for stopping and starting the disk motor cannot be performed per
the Eco-mode schedule.
• When using the NTP server, the time modification method is step mode
(modify immediately).
The procedure to modify date and time is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Modify Date and Time] under the [System Settings] menu on the
[Global Settings] tab.
→ The [Modify Date and Time] screen appears.
2
Specify the following items, and click the [Set] button.
• Date/Time Information
- Current Time
Current date and time setting is displayed.
- Date
To change the "Current Time", input the new date and time.
• Time Zone
Set the time difference (GMT).
- Time Zone
Select the Time Zone from the list box. If the appropriate Time Zone does not exist,
select "Manually", and specify the time difference using "+" or "-", hour, and minute.
• Daylight Saving Time
- Set
Select whether to set the Daylight Saving Time "ON" or "OFF" with the radio button.
- Range
If "Set" is "ON", set the Daylight Saving Time period. Select "by day of the week" or
"by Date" with the radio button, and input the required parameters.
235
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.4 System Settings
When selecting "by day of the week", the "Last" can be selected
to specify the start or end week.
When selecting "by Date", the "Last Date" can be selected to
specify the start or end date.
• NTP Service
- NTP server
Select "NTP enabled" or "NTP disabled" with the radio button. When NTP is
enabled, input the IP address or domain name for the NTP server in the text box.
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is synchronized with the NTP server in a step mode
fashion.
- LAN Port used for NTP
Select the LAN port to be used for NTP connection from "MNT" or "RMT".
- Access Status
Access state to the NTP server is displayed.
→ A confirmation screen appears.
3
Click the [OK] button.
→ The date and time setting is set.
End of procedure
236
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.4 System Settings
6.4.2
Modify Storage System Name
The [Modify Storage System Name] function is used to set the name, administrator, and installation site of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Disk storage system.
Information registered in this screen is used for the following functions and screens:
• Network management using SNMP
• Storage system name displayed in logon screen and operation screens
• Friendly Name (storage system name)(*1) for Virtual Disk Service (VDS)
*1:
VDS is a storage management function of the Windows Server®.
The procedure to register the storage system name is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Modify Storage System Name] under the [System Settings] menu on
the [Global Settings] tab.
→ The [Modify Storage System Name] screen appears.
2
Specify the following items, and click the [Set] button.
• Name
Specify the storage system name.
Between 1 and 16 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ', (comma)' and '?', and
'% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be used.
• Installation Location
Specify the installation location of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90.
Between 1 and 50 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ', (comma)' and '?', and
'% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be used.
• Administrator
Specify the system administrator name
Between 1 and 50 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ', (comma)' and '?', and
'% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be used.
• Description
Specify the description of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90.
Between 1 and 50 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ', (comma)' and '?', and
'% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be used.
• When changing the storage system name, all the parameters in
this menu must be set.
• Once a parameter value is specified, the parameter cannot be
deleted (values can be changed).
237
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.4 System Settings
→ A confirmation screen appears.
3
Click the [OK] button.
→ The specified storage system name is registered.
End of procedure
6.4.3
Setup Encryption Mode
The [Setup Encryption Mode] function enables or disables encryption mode.
When encryption mode is enabled, an encryption buffer is secured in the cache memory of the
controller module.
238
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.4 System Settings
• When the "Setup Encryption Mode" is not displayed in the menu, the
encryption function is not available.
• Encryption related functions are only available after enabling encryption
mode.
• When disabling the encryption mode, reboot the ETERNUS DX60/
DX80/DX90.
• The encryption buffer capacity for each controller module (CM0/CM1) is
76MB for ETERNUS DX60, and 230MB for ETERNUS DX80/DX90.
• Once encrypted, volumes cannot be changed to non-encrypted
volumes.
• When disabling the encryption mode, delete all the encrypted volumes
and volumes being encrypted in advance.
• Encryption function cannot be used under the following conditions:
- Encrypted volumes exist
- Volumes being encrypted exist
- Required cache memory capacity cannot be secured for enabling the
encryption mode
The procedure to set the encryption mode is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Setup Encryption Mode] under the [System Settings] menu on the
[Global Settings] tab.
→ The [Setup Encryption Mode] screen appears.
2
Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" encryption mode, and click the [Set]
button.
→ A confirmation screen appears.
239
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.4 System Settings
3
Click the [OK] button.
→ The encryption mode is set.
End of procedure
6.4.4
Change Box ID
The [Change Box ID] function changes the Box ID that identifies an ETERNUS DX60/DX80/
DX90 in the user system.
Box ID is used as information to identify the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 from applications connected to the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. The initial Box ID is a device ID that is created by
combining device information (series name, model, serial number, etc.).
If upgrading or replacing the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90, the existing Box ID will change with
the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 change. Therefore, there is a risk that the backup data saved
in the previous ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 cannot be used, so it is necessary to reconfigure
the user system after the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is upgraded or replaced. This function
changes the device BOX ID to the same ID as that of the previous ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90
in order to avoid any problems and also use the same backup data in the new device.
• A Box ID is a unique name in the user system. Make the Box ID different
from that of other ETERNUS Disk storage systems in the user system. If
the Box ID is not changed, the Device ID is used as a Box ID.
• You cannot change the Box ID during Advanced Copy or RAID
migration.
The procedure to change Box ID is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Change Box ID] under the [System Settings] menu on the [Global
Settings] tab.
→ The [Change Box ID] screen appears.
240
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.4 System Settings
2
Input the Box ID and click the [Set] button.
Set the Box ID with 40 characters.
The Box ID is fixed at 40 characters. Alphabetic characters (upper case), numerals, hash
key characters (#), and blanks can be used. If the input value includes blanks or is less
than 40 characters, "#" symbols are added to make the Box ID code 40 digits.
In the following conditions, a Box ID cannot be set.
• When the entered value of a Box ID is not alphabetic characters
(upper case), numerals, blanks, or hash key characters (#)
• When the entered value exceeds the maximum number of characters
→ A confirmation screen appears.
3
Click the [OK] button.
→ The specified Box ID is registered.
End of procedure
241
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.4 System Settings
6.4.5
Setup Power Management
The [Setup Power Management] function connects the external input device and controls (shuts
down) the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 power.
• When using power management function, the AUTO POWER switch
(AC power interlock mode) setting as well as GUI setting for ETERNUS
DX60/DX80/DX90 is required. Refer to "ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90
Disk storage system User Guide" for details.
• If this function is enabled by mistake, the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90
may shut down unexpectedly.
The procedure to set the power management is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Setup Power Management] under the [System Settings] menu on the
[Global Settings] tab.
→ The [Setup Power Management] screen appears.
2
Specify the following items, and click the [Set] button.
• Enable
Select the controller module to enable power management by an external input device
(both checkbox can be selected at the same time).
- CM#0
- CM#1
When the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 has only one CM, CM#1
cannot be selected.
• Delay until Shutdown (min.)
Set the delay time before starting shutdown after receiving a battery low signal between
0 and 15 (minutes).
• Set management unit interface
Select the device connecting via RS232C interface.
The "Manual" setting is for particular use, thus should not be used during normal
operation.
- Power Synchronized Unit
- PMAN
- Manual
• Power Failure Signal
Select the signal logic for power failure signal when the power failure occurs (Positive:
positive logic, Negative: negative logic).
• Low Battery Signal
Select the signal logic for a low battery signal when a low battery charge occurs
(Positive: positive logic, Negative: negative logic).
242
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.4 System Settings
• UPS Shutdown Signal
When enabling the UPS shutdown signal, select the "Enable" checkbox. Also, select
the signal logic for UPS shutdown signal (Positive: positive logic, Negative: negative
logic).
→ A confirmation screen appears.
3
Click the [OK] button.
→ The power management setting is set.
End of procedure
6.4.6
Setup Subsystem Parameters
The [Setup Subsystem Parameters] function changes the subsystem parameters in order to control ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 operation when it is connected to hosts. The ETERNUS DX60/
DX80/DX90 operates according to the set subsystem parameters, for all the hosts to be connected.
• Do not change the setting after installing the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/
DX90, unless a maintenance engineer instructs otherwise.
• To set the subsystem parameters using this function, set them after
stopping all host access.
243
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.4 System Settings
The procedure to set the subsystem parameters are as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Setup Subsystem Parameters] under the [System Settings] menu on
the [Global Settings] tab.
→ The [Setup Subsystem Parameters] screen appears.
2
Specify the following item, and click the [Set] button.
• Load Balance
Set whether to enable the load balance for the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90.
Select the checkbox to enable the load balance.
When the load balance is enabled and the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is overloaded,
the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 answers the sense specified in the "Load Balance
Response" field of the [Setup Host Response] function. If the load balance is disabled,
the warning sense response is suppressed and the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 does
not answer the sense of any host connecting to the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90.
• Load balance for all hosts is disabled when the "Load
Balance" checkbox is cleared. If the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/
DX90 is in overload in this status, the warning sense response
is suppressed.
• When connecting the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 and HPUX hosts, clear (disable) the "Load Balance" checkbox. If the
"Load Balance" checkbox is selected (enabled), incorrect logs
may be recorded in the host.
• Load balancing by Multipath Driver is operated regardless if
the "Load Balance" is enabled/disabled.
• Reject INQUIRY from Unauthorized Host
Select whether to reject the "Inquiry" command from an unauthorized host.
Select the checkbox to reject the "Inquiry" command from an unauthorized host.
When rejecting the command, the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 returns an Affinity
Error (5/25/81) for the "Inquiry" command from the unauthorized host. When not
rejecting the command, the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 responds normally.
When using the VERITAS Volume Manager Dynamic
Multipathing (VxVM DMP), select the checkbox.
• Checkcode Enforcement
Set whether to enable the Checkcode Enforcement mode.
Select the checkbox to enable the mode.
When enable this mode, the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 enhances the error
detection function.
When write I/O for user-data is duplicated, the checkcodes of all the data blocks are
checked.
244
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.4 System Settings
• Internal Bus Recovery
Set whether to enable the Internal Bus Recovery mode.
Select the checkbox to enable the mode.
When enable this mode, the ETERNUS DX80/DX90 resets the internal bus to recover
from internal errors. Note that the Fibre Channel connection is lost for a few seconds
during this process (For 8Gbit/s FC models only).
→ A confirmation screen appears.
3
Click the [OK] button.
→ The subsystem parameters are set.
6.4.7
Setup Event Notification
The [Setup Event Notification] function selects whether to report events detected in the
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90.
There are four methods for event notification: E-Mail, SNMP Trap, Host Sense, and REMCS.
For E-Mail notification, performing "6.2.5 Setup E-Mail Notification" (page 210) is required.
For SNMP Trap notification, performing "6.2.2 Setup SNMP Agent" (page 203) is required.
For REMCS for event notification, performing "6.3.3 Setup Remote Support" (page 218) is
required.
A notification setting can be selected for each type of event.
When selecting REMCS for event notification, only the REC related error
event settings can be changed.
Note that REMCS field is not displayed for the ETERNUS DX60/DX80.
245
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.4 System Settings
The procedure to set the event notification is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Setup Event Notification] under the [System Settings] menu on the
[Global Settings] tab.
→ The [Setup Event Notification] screen appears.
2
Select whether or not to report for each event type.
The events are classified into three levels: "Error Severity Level", "Warning Level", and
"Informational Level".
Click the link on the left of the screen to display the setting fields for each level.
Some notification methods cannot be selected depending on the
event type.
• Setting based on Severity
Select whether to notify of an event by levels. When enabling the notification, select the
method from "E-Mail", "SNMP Trap", "Host Sense Key Code Qualifier", or "REMCS"
(for ETERNUS DX90) (multiple selections can be made).
When setting the notification method for each event, move on to the setting fields for
each level.
- All Error Events
Select whether to notify when an error level event occurs. When notifying, select the
notification method.
- All Warning Events
Select whether to notify when a warning level event occurs. When notifying, select
the notification method.
- All Informational Events
Select whether to notify when a informational level event occurs. When notifying,
select the notification method.
- Individual Settings within Severity Level
"Yes" is displayed when the target notification method ("E-Mail", "SNMP Trap",
"Host Sense Key Code Qualifier", or "REMCS" (for ETERNUS DX90)) is specified
for any event in "Error Severity Level", "Warning Level", or "Information Level", if
not, "No" is displayed.
246
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.4 System Settings
• Error Severity Level
Select whether to notify of the error event for each event type.
"Remote Path Error", "REC Buffer Halt (Path Error)", "REC Buffer Halt (Overload)", and
"REC Buffer Halt (Error)" are displayed only when using the ETERNUS DX90.
When enabling the notification, select the method from "E-Mail", "SNMP Trap", "Host
Sense Key Code Qualifier", or "REMCS" (for ETERNUS DX90) (multiple selections can
be made).
- Disk was broken
Select whether to notify when a disk failure occurs. When notifying, select the
notification method.
- Broken Disk (when HS<0)
Select whether to notify when a disk failure occurs but no hot spare disk is
registered. When notifying, select the notification method.
- Module was broken
Select whether to notify when a module failure occurs. When notifying, select the
notification method.
- Remote Path Error
Select whether to notify when an REC path error occurs. When notifying, select the
notification method.
- REC Buffer Halt (Path Error)
Select whether to notify when an REC buffer halt caused by REC path error occurs.
When notifying, select the notification method.
- REC Buffer Halt (Overload)
Select whether to notify when an REC buffer halt caused by overload occurs. When
notifying, select the notification method.
- REC Buffer Halt (Error)
Select whether to notify when an REC buffer halt caused by an error occurs. When
notifying, select the notification method.
- Copy Session Error
Select whether to notify when a copy session error (Error Suspend or Halt) occurs.
When notifying, select the notification method.
247
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.4 System Settings
• Warning Level
Select whether to notify of a warning event for each event type.
When enabling the notification, select the method from "E-Mail", "SNMP Trap", "Host
Sense Key Code Qualifier", or "REMCS" (for ETERNUS DX90) (multiple selections can
be made).
- Disk reported a Warning
Select whether to notify when a warning level event occurs in the disk. When
notifying, select the notification method.
- Warning Disk (when HS<0)
Select whether to notify when a warning level event occurs in the disk but no hot
spare disk is registered. When notifying, select the notification method.
- Module reported a Warning
Select whether to notify when a warning level event occurs in the module. When
notifying, select the notification method.
- RAID Degradation Event
Select whether to notify when a RAID degradation event occurs. When notifying,
select the notification method.
- RAID Degradation Event (when HS<0)
Select whether to notify when a RAID degradation event occurs but no hot spare
disk is registered. When notifying, select the notification method.
- RAID Recovery Event
Select whether to notify when a degraded RAID group is recovered. When notifying,
select the notification method.
- Recovery from Error
Select whether to notify when recovered from an error status. When notifying, select
the notification method.
- Blink Panel Fault LED
Select "Enable" when setting the Fault LED in the front panel to blink while a
warning level event occurs, and select "Disable" when setting the Fault LED not to
blink.
248
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.4 System Settings
• Informational Level
Select whether to notify of an information event for each event type.
When notification is enabled, select the method from "E-Mail" or "SNMP Trap" (both
settings can be selected).
- Power on Completed
Select whether to notify when the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 startup has
completed. When notifying, select the notification method.
- Controller Firmware updated
Select whether to notify when the controller firmware has been updated. When
notifying, select the notification method.
- Created RAID Group
Select whether to notify when the RAID group has been created. When notifying,
select the notification method.
- Deleted RAID Group
Select whether to notify when the RAID group has been deleted. When notifying,
select the notification method.
- RAID Group Name Changed
Select whether to notify when the RAID group name has been changed. When
notifying, select the notification method.
- Assigned Hot Spare
Select whether to notify when the hot spare has been registered. When notifying,
select the notification method.
- Released Hot Spare
Select whether to notify when the hot spare has been released. When notifying,
select the notification method.
- Created Volume
Select whether to notify when the volume has been created. When notifying, select
the notification method.
- Deleted Volume
Select whether to notify when the volume has been deleted. When notifying, select
the notification method.
249
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.4 System Settings
- Volume Name Changed
Select whether to notify when the volume name has been changed. When notifying,
select the notification method.
- FC / iSCSI / SAS Port Parameters Changed
Select whether to notify when the port parameters have been changed. When
notifying, select the notification method.
Displayed content varies depending on the model type.
- FC / iSCSI / SAS Host Information Changed
Select whether to notify when the host information has been changed. When
notifying, select the notification method.
Displayed content varies depending on the model type.
- Host Name Defined
Select whether to notify when the host name has been defined. When notifying,
select the notification method.
- LUN Mapping Changed
Select whether to notify when the LUN mapping has been changed. When notifying,
select the notification method.
- Host Response Changed
Select whether to notify when the host response has been changed. When
notifying, select the notification method.
- Reset Group Changed
Select whether to notify when the reset group has been changed. When notifying,
select the notification method.
- Error condition defined by SDP policy
Select whether to notify when an error level event occurs in the SDP policy. When
notifying, select the notification method.
- Warning condition defined by SDP policy
Select whether to notify when a warning level event occurs in the SDP policy. When
notifying, select the notification method.
- Informational message defined by SDP policy
Select whether to notify when an informational level event occurs in the SDP policy.
When notifying, select the notification method.
250
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.4 System Settings
Threshold of SDP policy level can be specified with "5.4.4 Modify
Copy Parameters" (page 156) function.
3
Click the [Set] button.
→ A confirmation screen appears.
4
Click the [OK] button.
→ The specified event notification setting is enabled.
End of procedure
251
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.5 Host I/F Management
6.5
Host I/F Management
Host I/F Management provides the following host connection related functions.
• Set Port Parameters
• Setup Host
• Setup Host Response
• Modify Reset Group
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 can relate the Logical Unit Number (LUN) of the host to volumes in
the device, and set or limit the volume that is recognized from the host.
Host Affinity relates the LUN and volume to each interface port connected in the host.
● When using Host Affinity function
The [Host I/F Management] is used when connecting multiple servers via a switch.
The server recognizes the affinity group specified for each Host Bus Adapter (HBA).
By restricting the volumes can be recognized from each server, security improvement is
expected.
The following shows a basic concept for affinity group.
Apply Affinity Group #00 for the access from
HBA#A (=Server A) and HBA#B (=Server B)
Restrict the server
that can be accessed
per port
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90
LUN#0
Switch
:
Server A
HBA#A
LUN#127
Affinity Group #00
Port
LUN#0
Volume#0
:
:
LUN#127
Volume#127
LUN#0
Affinity Group #01
:
Server B
HBA#B
LUN#0
Volume#128
LUN#127
:
:
LUN#127
Volume#255
Port
LUN#0
:
Server C
HBA#C
LUN#127
Apply Affinity Group #01 for the access from
HBA#C(=Server C)
252
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.5 Host I/F Management
● When Host Affinity function is not used
When the host affinity function is not used, the server recognizes the volume related to LUN in
each ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 port.
This method is suitable for connecting the server and ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 directly.
The following shows a basic concept when the same volume is LUN mapped to each port.
LUN#0 = Volume#0
:
LUN#127 = Volume#127
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90
LUN#0
Port
:
Server A
Volume#0
LUN#127
:
Volume#127
LUN#0
Port
:
Server B
LUN#127
:
Server A and Server B
recognize the Volume#0 as LUN#0
LUN#0 = Volume#0
:
LUN#127 = Volume#127
The following shows a basic concept when different volumes are LUN mapped to each port.
LUN#0 = Volume#0
:
LUN#127 = Volume#127
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90
Server A recognizes Volume#0
as LUN#0
LUN#0
:
Server A
Volume#0
Port
:
LUN#127
Volume#127
Volume#128
LUN#0
:
Server B
Port
::
Volume#255
LUN#127
Server B recognizes
Volume#128 as LUN#0
LUN#0 = Volume#128
:
LUN#127 = Volume#255
253
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.5 Host I/F Management
6.5.1
Set Port Parameters
The [Set Port Parameters] function sets the connecting information for ports to connect to the
server.
There are three types of host interfaces; FC, iSCSI, and SAS. Procedures to set port parameters
vary depending on the host interface types.
When the Host Affinity function is enabled, use the [Setup Host] function to
set the host response for each host. When the Host Affinity function is
disabled, use the [Set Port Parameters] function to set the host response
for each port.
For details, refer to "ETERNUS DX Disk storage systems User’s Guide Server Connection-" for each operating system.
Set FC Port Parameters
The [Set FC Port Parameters] function sets the connection information between the FC port of
the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 and host, or connection information between the local and
remote devices (FC port parameters).
• For ETERNUS DX90
There are two types of port modes; CA, used for connecting to the host, and RA, which is
used for REC.
Use the procedure described in "5.4.8 Modify Port Mode" (page 184) to change port the
mode.
• For ETERNUS DX60/DX80
Only the CA port mode is available.
The setting items vary depending on the port mode.
The procedure to set FC port parameters is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Set FC Port Parameters] under the [Host I/F Management] menu on
the [Global Settings] tab.
→ The [Set FC Port Parameters] screen appears.
2
Specify the following items, and click the [Set] button.
- When the port mode is "CA"
• Port
Select the target port.
• Port Mode
Port mode for the target port is displayed.
• Connection
Select the connection method for the target port from the "Fabric" or "FC-AL". When
"FC-AL" is selected, it is necessary to assign a Loop ID to the port.
• Set Loop ID
When the "Connection" is "FC-AL", select "Manual" or "Auto" to specify the Loop ID.
254
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.5 Host I/F Management
• Loop ID
When the "Set Loop ID" is "Auto", select "Ascending" or "Descending".
When the "Set Loop ID" is "Manual", specify the Loop ID (last 2 digits of 0x00 to 0x7D).
• Transfer Rate (Gbit/s)
Select the transfer speed of the target port from the following:
- For 4Gbit/s models
• Auto Negotiation
• 1
• 2
• 4
- For 8Gbit/s models
• Auto Negotiation
• 2
• 4
• 8
• Frame Size (bytes)
Select the frame size of the target port according to the destination server or switch
(2048, 1024, or 512).
• Host Affinity
Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the Host Affinity function for the target port.
Select "Enable" when restricting access to volumes for each server (when connecting
via switches).
Select "Disable" when restricting access to volumes for each port (when connecting
directly to the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90).
When connecting multiple servers and the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 directly and
restricting access to volumes for each server, enable the Host Affinity setting.
• Host Response
When the "Host Affinity" is "Disabled", select the host response to allocate to the target
port.
- 0:Default
The initial pattern is displayed. Sense information is not converted.
- Host Response (Number:Name)
Identification number of the host response registered in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/
DX90 is displayed.
When the host response name is registered, it is also displayed.
• Reset Scope
Select the reset scope from "I_T_L" or "T_L".
Reset scope is the range where the command reset request from the server is
performed, when the port is connected to multiple servers.
- I_T_L (I: Initiator, T: Target, L: LUN)
Reset (cancel) the command request from the server that sent the command reset
request.
- T_L (T: Target, L: LUN)
Reset (cancel) the command request from all servers that are connected to the port
(regardless of whether the LUN is recognized).
• Release Reservation if Chip is Reset
Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the function to release the volume's reserved
status when the target port (chip) is in Reset status.
255
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.5 Host I/F Management
- When the port mode is "RA"
• Port
Select the target port.
• Port Mode
Port mode for the target port is displayed.
• Connection
Select the connection method for the target port from the "Fabric" or "FC-AL". When
"FC-AL" is selected, it is necessary to assign a Loop ID to the port.
• Set Loop ID
When the "Connection" is "FC-AL", select "Manual" or "Auto" to specify the Loop ID.
• Loop ID
When the "Set Loop ID" is "Manual", specify the Loop ID (last 2 digits of 0x00 to 0x7D).
When the "Set Loop ID" is "Auto", select "Ascending" or "Descending".
• Transfer Rate (Gbit/s)
Select the transfer speed of the target port from the following:
- Auto Negotiation
- 2
- 4
- 8
256
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.5 Host I/F Management
Clicking the [Copy] button displays the screen for selecting the copy
destination port. The port parameters are copied to the selected port.
Note that copy can be performed between ports that have the same
port mode.
→ A confirmation screen appears.
3
Click the [OK] button.
→ The FC port parameters are set.
End of procedure
Set iSCSI Port Parameters
The [Set iSCSI Port Parameters] function sets the connection information between the iSCSI
port of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 and host (iSCSI port parameters).
• Each port must have a unique IP address. The same IP address cannot
be set again in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80.
• An iSCSI name is a unique name in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80. The
same iSCSI name cannot be specified for multiple iSCSI ports.
However, the same iSCSI name has been specified for all ports by
default (only the default value can be same). When these name must be
recognized separately, change the iSCSI names. For multipath
connection, iSCSI names must be changed.
257
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.5 Host I/F Management
The procedure to set iSCSI port parameters is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Set iSCSI Port Parameters] under the [Host I/F Management] menu
on the [Global Settings] tab.
→ The [Set iSCSI Port Parameters] screen appears.
2
Specify the following items, and click the [Set] button.
• Port
Select the target port.
• IP Address
Specify the IP address (0 to 255) for the target port (required).
Click the [Test Connection (ping)] button to display the [Send ping
Command] screen. Specify the IP address of the connection
destination device whose connection status is to be checked and
number of execution, and click the [Send] button.
Sending the "ping" command enables you to check whether the
IP address is allocated correctly, and connection path to the
destination device is normal.
• Subnet Mask
Set the subnet mask (0 to 255) for the target port (required).
• Default Gateway
Set the IP address (0 to 255) for the default gateway.
• iSNS Server
Select wether to use the iSNS server in the target port.
When "Enable" is selected, specify the IP address (0 to 255) for the iSNS server.
Internet Storage Name Service (iSNS) is almost equivalent to
Domain Name System (DNS) for the Internet. iSNS server is
used to convert the iSCSI name to the IP address on the iSCSI
network.
• iSCSI Name
Set the iSCSI name for the target port. Between 4 and 223 alphanumeric characters
and symbols (’- (hyphen)’, ’: (colon)’, ’. (period)’) can be used. Click the [Default] button
to set the default iSCSI name.
An iSCSI name is a unique name in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80.
The same iSCSI name cannot be set to multiple iSCSI ports
except the device iSCSI name.
• Alias Name
Set the alias name for the target port. Between 1 and 31 alphanumeric characters and
symbols (including blanks) can be used.
While the iSCSI name is a formal nomenclature that specifies the target iSCSI port, an
alias name is used as nickname.
258
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.5 Host I/F Management
• Host Affinity
Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the Host Affinity function for the target port.
Select "Enable" when restricting access to volumes for each server (when connecting
via switches).
Select "Disable" when restricting access to volumes for each port (when connecting
directly to the ETERNUS DX60/DX80).
When connecting multiple servers and the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 directly and
restricting access to volumes for each server, enable the Host Affinity setting.
• Host Response
When the "Host Affinity" is "Disabled", select the host response to allocate to the target
port.
- 0:Default
The initial pattern is displayed. Sense information is not converted.
- Host Response (Number:Name)
Identification number of the host response registered in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80
is displayed.
When the host response name is registered, it is also displayed.
• Jumbo Frame
Select wether to enable or disable the Jumbo Frame.
Select "Enable" when using the Jumbo Frame to transfer data via the target port. When
not using the Jumbo Frame, select "Disable".
Enabling Jumbo Frame increases the amount of data to be transferred per Frame,
making data transfer more efficient.
Confirm that the connected device (*1) supports the Jumbo Frame before enabling the
Jumbo Frame.
*1:
When the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 and server are connected directly, this indicates that the
connected device is a server side LAN card (NIC). When the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 and
server are connected via a switch, this indicates that the connected device is a switch.
• Transfer Rate
Select the transfer speed of the target port from the following:
- Auto Negotiation
- 100Mbit/s
- 1Gbit/s
Note that since the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 iSCSI port does
not support the Half-Duplex mode, the connected device (*1)
must be set as follows.
Transfer speed of the
ETERNUS DX60/DX80
*1:
Transfer speed of the
connected device (*1)
Auto Negotiation
Auto Negotiation
100Mbit/s
100Mbit/s (Full)
1Gbit/s
1Gbit/s
When the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 and server are connected
directly, this indicates that the connected device is a server side
LAN card (NIC). When the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 and server
are connected via a switch, this indicates that the connected
device is a switch.
259
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.5 Host I/F Management
• Reset Scope
Select the reset scope from "I_T_L" or "T_L".
Reset scope is the range where the command reset request from the server is
performed, when the port is connected to multiple servers.
- I_T_L (I: Initiator, T: Target, L: LUN)
Reset (cancel) the command request from the server that sent the command reset
request.
- T_L (T: Target, L: LUN)
Reset (cancel) the command request from all servers that are connected to the port
(regardless of whether the LUN is recognized).
• Release Reservation if Chip is Reset
Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the function to release the volume's reserved
status when the target port (chip) is in Reset status.
• CHAP
Select "ON" when enabling CHAP authentication for the target port. To disable, select
"OFF".
For CHAP authentication, an encrypted password based on a random key that the
ETERNUS DX60/DX80 receives from the host is sent, and connection possibility is
judged on the server side.
• CHAP User Name
When "ON" is selected for "CHAP", specify the user name that accesses the target
port. Between 1 and 255 characters of alphanumeric characters and symbols
(including blanks) can be used.
This setting is required when CHAP authentication is used.
Make sure to set the user name and password in pairs.
• Change CHAP Password
When changing the CHAP password, select the checkbox. This checkbox can only be
selected when "ON" is selected for "CHAP" and the password has already been set.
• Password
Specify the password for the currently specifying "Chap User Name".
• New Password
When "ON" is elected for "CHAP", specify the password that accesses the target port.
Between 12 and 100 alphanumeric characters and symbols (including blanks) can be
used.
Make sure to set the user name and password in pairs.
• Confirm new Password
Input the same character strings as the value entered in the "New Password" field for
confirmation.
• Header Digest
Select "OFF" when not adding Header Digest of the target port. When adding, select
"CRC32C".
Header Digest is a check code to be added to the header part of the iSCSI port detailed
information.
Specify "CRC32C" when the host requests to add the check code. "CRC32C" is
algorithmic to create a check code.
• Data Digest
Select "OFF" when not adding Data Digest of the target port. When adding, select
"CRC32C".
Data Digest is a check code to be added to the data area of the iSCSI port detailed
information.
Specify "CRC32C" when the host requests to add the check code. "CRC32C" is
algorithmic to create a check code.
260
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.5 Host I/F Management
• [Set iSCSI Port Parameters] screen (1/2)
• [Set iSCSI Port Parameters] screen (2/2)
→ A confirmation screen appears.
3
Click the [OK] button.
→ The iSCSI port parameters are set.
End of procedure
261
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.5 Host I/F Management
Set SAS Port Parameters
The [Set SAS Port Parameters] function sets the connection information between the SAS port of
the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 and host (SAS port parameters).
The procedure to set SAS port parameters is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Set SAS Port Parameters] under the [Host I/F Management] menu on
the [Global Settings] tab.
→ The [Set SAS Port Parameters] screen appears.
2
Specify the following items, and click the [Set] button.
• Port
Select the target port.
• Host Affinity
Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the Host Affinity function for the target port.
Select "Enable" when restricting access to volumes for each server.
Select "Disable" when restricting access to volumes for each port.
When connecting multiple servers and the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 directly and
restricting access to volumes for each server, enable the Host Affinity setting.
• Host Response
When the "Host Affinity" is "Disabled", select the host response to allocate to the target
port.
- 0:Default
The initial pattern is displayed. Sense information is not converted.
- Host Response (Number:Name)
Identification number of the host response registered in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80
is displayed.
When the host response name is registered, it is also displayed.
• Reset Scope
Select the reset scope from "I_T_L" or "T_L".
Reset scope is the range where the command reset request from the server is
performed, when the port is connected to multiple servers.
- I_T_L (I: Initiator, T: Target, L: LUN)
Reset (cancel) the command request from the server that sent the command reset
request.
- T_L (T: Target, L: LUN)
Reset (cancel) the command request from all servers that are connected to the port
(regardless of whether the LUN is recognized).
• Release Reservation if Chip is Reset
Select whether to "Enable" or "Disable" the function to release the volume's reserved
status when the target port (chip) is in Reset status.
262
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.5 Host I/F Management
→ A confirmation screen appears.
3
Click the [OK] button.
→ The SAS port parameters are set.
End of procedure
6.5.2
Setup Host
The [Setup Host] function registers the HBA information to the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. By
registering HBA information, access to the volumes in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is
restricted, and connections from servers with unregistered hosts are not allowed (when the Host
Affinity function is enabled).
There are three types of host interfaces; FC, iSCSI, and SAS. The required setting varies
depending on the host interface type.
• Host setting is not needed when the Host Affinity function is not used.
• When deleting the currently running host, the access from the target
host must be stopped. To set a new host, it is not necessary to stop host
access.
• When deleting host information, the settings for the affinity group and
LUN mapping that are associated with the host must be disabled in
advance.
• When using the Host Affinity functions, make sure to "Enable" the Host
Affinity setting of the port using the [Set Port Parameters] function.
263
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.5 Host I/F Management
For details, refer to "ETERNUS DX Disk storage systems User’s Guide Server Connection-" for each operating system.
Setup FC Host
The [Setup FC Host] function registers the FC information of the HBAs installed in the FC host to
be connected to the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90.
Up to 16 FC hosts (HBAs) per port can be connected for ETERNUS DX60.
For ETERNUS DX80/DX90, up to 32 FC hosts per port can be connected.
The procedures to set the FC Host (register) are as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Setup FC Host] under the [Host I/F Management] menu on the [Global
Settings] tab.
→ The [Setup FC Host] screen appears.
2
Click the [Add] button.
→ The "Add New FC Host" field is displayed.
264
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.5 Host I/F Management
When changing or deleting the FC host settings, select the target FC
host in the "Registered FC Host List" field, and click the [Edit] or
[Delete] button.
When deleting all the registered FC hosts, click the [Delete All]
button.
3
Specify the following items, and click the [Add] button.
• FC Port
The list of FC port existing in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is displayed.
When a fibre channel switch is connected to the ETERNUS
DX60/DX80/DX90, settings between the fibre channel switch and
server (FC host) must be completed in advance.
When using an ETERNUS DX90, ports in which the port mode is
"CA" are displayed in the FC Port field. Refer to "5.4.8 Modify Port
Mode" (page 184) for details about port mode.
• WWN
Select the WWN, or directly input a WWN (required). 16 capital letters and numerals
can be used.
• Name
Specify the FC host name (required).
Between 1 and 16 alphanumeric characters, symbols (except ', (comma)' and '?', and
'% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be used.
• Host Response
Specify the host response for the target host (required).
265
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.5 Host I/F Management
→ The target FC host is added in the "Registered FC Host List".
To add multiple FC hosts, repeat the procedure for all the FC hosts to be added.
4
After registering all the FC hosts, click the [Done] button.
266
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.5 Host I/F Management
5
Click the [Set] button.
→ A confirmation screen appears.
6
Click the [OK] button.
→ The FC host is set (registered).
End of procedure
267
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.5 Host I/F Management
Setup iSCSI Host
The [Setup iSCSI Host] function registers the iSCSI information of the Host Bus Adapters (HBAs)
installed in the SAS host to be connected to the ETERNUS DX60/DX80.
For iSCSI connection, configure the server as an iSCSI initiator (the host that sends commands),
and the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 as an iSCSI target (the device that executes the commands).
Authentication is performed using the iSCSI name in each session between an initiator and target. CHAP Authentication, which matches the user name and password, can be performed in
this phase.
Up to 16 iSCSI hosts (HBAs) per port can be connected for ETERNUS
DX60. For ETERNUS DX80, up to 32 iSCSI hosts per port can be
connected.
The procedures to set the iSCSI Host (register) are as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Setup iSCSI Host] under the [Host I/F Management] menu on the
[Global Settings] tab.
→ The [Setup iSCSI Host] screen appears.
2
Click the [Add] button.
When the IP address of the iSCSI host is not specified (0.0.0.0 is
specified), "*" is displayed in the "IP Address" field of the "Registered
iSCSI Host List".
→ The "Add New iSCSI Host" field is displayed.
268
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.5 Host I/F Management
When changing or deleting the iSCSI host settings, select the target
iSCSI host in the "Registered iSCSI Host List" field, and click the
[Edit] or [Delete] button.
When deleting all the registered iSCSI hosts, click the [Delete All]
button.
3
Specify the following items, and click the [Add] button.
• iSCSI Port
The list of iSCSI port existing in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 is displayed.
• iSCSI Name
Select the iSCSI Name, or directly input the iSCSI Name (required). Between 4 and
223 alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used.
The iSCSI Name cannot be obtained automatically in the
following conditions:
• The [Discover] button is inactivated
• When "Disable" is selected for the "iSNS server" in the "Set
iSCSI Port Parameters"
• IP Address
Specify the IP address of the iSCSI host.
When the IP address is not used for registering the host, this item is not required.
• Name
Specify the iSCSI Host Name (required). Between 1 and 16 alphanumeric characters,
symbols (except ', (comma)' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be
used.
• Host Response
Specify the host response for the target host (required).
• Alias Name
Specify the alias name for the iSCSI host. Up to 31 alphanumeric characters and
symbols can be used.
• CHAP User Name
Specify the user name to access the target host. Between 0 and 255 alphanumeric
characters and symbols can be used. This setting is not needed when CHAP
authentication is not used.
269
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.5 Host I/F Management
• CHAP Password
Specify the password to access the target host. Between 12 and 100 alphanumeric
characters and symbols can be used.
Make sure to set the user name and password in pairs.
• Confirm CHAP Password
Input the same character strings as the value entered in the "CHAP Password" field for
confirmation.
→ The target iSCSI host is added in the "Registered iSCSI Host List".
To add multiple iSCSI hosts, repeat the procedure for all the iSCSI hosts to be added.
4
After registering all the iSCSI hosts, click the [Done] button.
270
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.5 Host I/F Management
5
Click the [Set] button.
→ A confirmation screen appears.
6
Click the [OK] button.
→ The iSCSI host is set (registered).
End of procedure
Setup SAS Host
The [Setup SAS Host] function registers the SAS information of the Host Bus Adapters (HBAs)
installed in the SAS host to be connected to the ETERNUS DX60/DX80.
Up to one SAS host (HBAs) per port can be connected.
The procedures to set the SAS Host (register) are as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Setup SAS Host] under the [Host I/F Management] menu on the
[Global Settings] tab.
→ The [Setup SAS Host] screen appears.
271
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.5 Host I/F Management
2
Click the [Add] button.
→ The "Add New SAS Host" field is displayed.
When changing or deleting the SAS host settings, select the target
SAS host in the "Registered SAS Host List" field, and click the [Edit]
or [Delete] button.
When deleting all the registered SAS hosts, click the [Delete All]
button.
272
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.5 Host I/F Management
3
Specify the following items, and click the [Add] button.
• SAS Port
The list of SAS port existing in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80 is displayed.
• SAS Address
Select the SAS address, or directly input a SAS address (required). 16 capital letters
and numerals can be used.
• Name
Specify the SAS Host Name (required). Between 1 and 16 alphanumeric characters,
symbols (except ', (comma)' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be
used.
• Host Response
Specify the host response for the target host (required).
→ The target SAS host is added in the "Registered SAS Host List".
To add multiple SAS hosts, repeat the procedure for all the SAS hosts to be added.
273
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.5 Host I/F Management
4
After registering all the SAS hosts, click the [Done] button.
5
Click the [Set] button.
→ A confirmation screen appears.
274
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.5 Host I/F Management
6
Click the [OK] button.
→ The SAS host is set (registered).
End of procedure
6.5.3
Setup Host Response
The [Setup Host Response] function adds, changes, and/or deletes the Host Response settings,
which is the information added to the response to the server.
By specifying the correct host response, it prevents the following conditions:
• Server cannot recognize the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 when connecting
• Server cannot take appropriate measures against an ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 error
For more details about setting the Host Response for each OS type, refer to "ETERNUS DX Disk
storage systems User’s Guide -Server Connection-".
• If the Host Response is not changed, the default pattern provided by the
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is assigned.
• If a host response item is in use by a port or host, release it from the port
or host (by associating them with the default host response) before
editing or deleting the host response.
• Up to 256 Host Responses can be set.
The target to be assigned to the Host Response varies depending on
whether the Host Affinity function is used or not used.
• When the Host Affinity function is used.
Set the Host Response per server HBA (Refer to "6.5.2 Setup Host"
(page 263)).
• When the Host Affinity function is not used.
Set the Host Response per port (Refer to "6.5.1 Set Port Parameters"
(page 254)).
The procedure to add the host response is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Setup Host Response] under the [Host I/F Management] menu on the
[Global Settings] tab.
→ The [Setup Host Response] screen appears.
275
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.5 Host I/F Management
2
Click the [Add] button.
→ The "Edit Host Response" field is displayed.
When changing or deleting the Host Response, select the target
Host Response from the tree in the left of screen or target Host
Response listed in the "Host Response List" field, and click the [Edit]
or [Delete] button.
When deleting all the registered Host Responses, click the [Delete
All] button.
276
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.5 Host I/F Management
3
Specify the following items, and click the [OK] button.
By clicking the button in the "Preset" field, the default host response
settings for each host environment can be specified.
• [Windows - msdsm] button
Changes the setting to the value recommended for connecting to
Windows hosts where Microsoft Device Specific Module (DSM)
has been installed.
• [Linux - devicemapper] button
Changes the setting to the value recommended for connecting to
Linux hosts where device-mapper-multipath has been installed.
• [Solaris - MPxIO] button
Changes the setting to the value recommended for connecting to
Solaris hosts where MPxIO has been installed.
• [VMware - ESX4] button
Changes the setting to the value recommended for connecting to
VMware hosts where VMware vSphere 4 (ESX 4.0) has been
installed.
• [VMware - ESX3.5] button
Changes the setting to the value recommended for connecting to
VMware hosts where VMware Infrastructure 3 (ESX 3.5 or ESXi
3.5) has been installed.
• [Egenera - PAN manager] button
Changes the setting to the value recommended for connecting to
Egenera hosts where PAN manager has been installed.
• Response No.
Host response identification number is displayed.
• Response Name
Specify the host response name. Between 1 and 16 alphanumeric characters, symbols
(except ', (comma)' and '?', and '% used as the first letter'), and blanks can be used.
• Byte-0 of Inquiry Response
Set the value for Byte-0 of the "Inquiry" command from "No Conversion (Default)" or
"Custom".
After the link between the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 and the host is established,
the host sends an "Inquiry" command to check the status of the volumes for a certain
period of time.
Specify the Byte-0 of the Inquiry data to respond this "Inquiry" command.
Byte-0 in the Inquiry data indicates the volume status.
- No Conversion (Default)
Responds with the value specified in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90.
- Custom
When the Byte-0 is "0x20 (configuration is available, unformatted)", converts the
Byte-0 value to "0x7f (configuration is not available)" and responds.
277
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.5 Host I/F Management
• Inquiry VPD ID Type
Set the Vital Product Data (VPD) information type to respond to the host.
VPD information includes the device information (Vender ID, Product ID for each
model, volume number, etc.) for the volume. Type1 and Type3 indicate the data format.
- Type1 + Type3 (Default)
- Type1
- Type3
• Inquiry Standard Data Version
Specify the Standard Data Version (version number of the SCSI standard) of the
"Inquiry" command.
- Version 5 (Default)
- Version 4
- Version 3
• Command Timeout Interval
Select the setting method for the command timeout interval from the following items.
- Default (25sec.)
- Customize
When "Customize" is selected, input a value between 10 and 255 seconds
(numeric).
• Load Balance Response
This field sets the response status when an overload-derived timeout is detected. The
server retry reaction is determined by this setting.
While the default response should be compatible with all systems, the setting may be
changed as required by any problems that occur. Contact your maintenance engineer
to change the setting.
- [Disable] Unit Attention (Default)
- [Disable] Busy
- [Disable] Queue Full
• Reservation Conflict Response for Test Unit Ready
Select whether to notify or not notify the Reservation Conflict to the "Test Unit Ready"
command when volumes from the other host are reserved.
- Normal (Default)
- Conflict
• Change Volume Mapping
Select whether to "No Report (Default)" or "Report" to the host when a volume that can
be accessed from the host is added or deleted.
• Volume Capacity Expansion
Select whether to "No Report (Default)" or "Report" to the host when the capacity of a
volume is changed.
• Vendor Unique Sense Code
Select whether to "No Report (Default)" or "Report" the vendor unique sense code to
the host.
Vendor Unique Sense indicates the unique sense code for each vendor that is not
coincident with host I/O.
278
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.5 Host I/F Management
• Host Specific Mode
Set the operation for specific host.
- Normal (Default)
- AIX Mode
Select this to prevent the command initialization and performance degradation.
- HP-UX Mode
Select this to recognize volumes with more than 8LU(s).
• Asymmetric / Symmetric Logical Unit Access
Select the access type from the host to Logical Unit.
- ACTIVE-ACTIVE / PREFERRED_PATH (Default)
- ACTIVE / ACTIVE
• Unrecoverable Sense Report Mode
Set the sense report mode for events that are unrecoverable even when an I/O retry
has been performed.
This item is enabled only when "Linux Recommended (When not using GRMPD)" for
"Sense Data Conversion" is selected.
- Disable (Default)
Sense reports to the host operate normally regardless of the status.
- Enable
Unnecessary I/O retries by the host are prevented when unrecoverable events
occur even when an I/O retry has been performed.
• Sense Data Conversion
Select the sense code conversion pattern.
- No Conversion (Default)
- Linux Recommended (When not using GRMPD)
Select this pattern to prevent malfunction of Linux hosts for which GR Multipath
Driver has not been installed.
- Windows Recommended (When not using GR/ETERNUS MPD or Device Driver)
Select this pattern to prevent malfunction of Windows® hosts for which GR/
ETERNUS Multipath Driver, or Device Driver have not been installed.
- Customize
This setting is displayed only when the special sense conversion pattern is
specified.
Settings can be checked in the "SK/ASC/ASCQ".
• SK/ASC/ASCQ
This field is displayed when "Customize" is selected for the "Sense Data Conversion".
- SK: Sense Key
- ASC: Additional Sense Code
- ASCQ: Additional Sense Code Qualifier
279
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.5 Host I/F Management
- [Setup Host Response] screen (1/4)
- [Setup Host Response] screen (2/4)
280
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.5 Host I/F Management
- [Setup Host Response] screen (3/4)
- [Setup Host Response] screen (4/4)
4
Click the [Set] button.
→ A confirmation screen appears.
5
Click the [OK] button.
→ The new host response is added.
End of procedure
281
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.5 Host I/F Management
6.5.4
Modify Reset Group
The [Modify Reset Group] sets the reset group to switch the path for some servers.
A reset group is a setting that groups multiple ports that will be reset. If a host is unable to access
the volumes in a port, this function releases the volumes reserved by the inaccessible port to the
ports in the specified reset group, without affecting other ports. The reset group setting sets this
range for each port.
When a 2-port configuration server (including duplication) using the same volume cannot be
accessed, it is possible to access the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 from the opposite port
(standby side). The port for the paths that access the same volume must be grouped in the same
reset group. Even if the server is different, ports accessing the same volume must be set in the
same reset group.
• When a port is shared by multiple servers using the "5.3.10 Configure
LUN Mapping" (page 131) function, only volumes that are included in
the LUN mapping assigned to the target server in the Host Affinity
setting are subject to release.
• One port cannot be registered in multiple reset groups.
• When using the ETERNUS DX90, ports whose port mode is "RA" cannot be selected as a grouping target port.
For more details on which server is necessary to set/change the reset
group, refer to "ETERNUS DX Disk storage systems User’s Guide -Server
Connection-" for each OS type.
282
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.5 Host I/F Management
The procedure to set the reset group is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Modify Reset Group] under the [Host I/F Management] menu on the
[Global Settings] tab.
→ The [Modify Reset Group] screen appears.
2
Select the port that belongs to the same reset group, and click the [Set] button.
→ A confirmation screen appears.
283
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 6 Global Settings
6.5 Host I/F Management
3
Click the [OK] button.
→ The reset group is set.
End of procedure
284
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 7
Maintenance
This chapter describes maintenance related operations.
7.1
Hot Expansion
This function can expand the components without stopping device operation.
The device needs expansion of components to the original configuration in order to enhance performance, increase the number of available volumes, or increase the number of connected
hosts.
Disks and drive enclosures can be expanded in hot mode.
Disks can be expanded in hot mode by physical installation in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90.
This operation does not require GUI operation.
● The maximum number of disks and drive enclosures
The following explains the maximum number of disks and drive enclosures that can be
installed in each model.
Model
Disk
Drive enclosure
ETERNUS DX60
24
1
ETERNUS DX80/DX90
120 (*1)
9
*1:
Up to nine SSDs can be installed in the ETERNUS DX80/DX90.
• The expanded disks can be used after registering in the RAID group
or as hot spare disks.
• When the maximum number of parts set for each model has already
been installed, the parts cannot be expanded.
• When adding two or more disks, install disks one by one after an
interval (of approximately 30 seconds). Confirm that the status LED
of the expanded disk glows green, then add the next disks.
• Be sure to use authorized expansion parts. If parts other than the
expansion parts are used, operation is not guaranteed.
• When encryption is in progress, disk expansion is not available.
Perform the disk expansion operation after completing the encryption
process.
• Only one drive enclosure can be added at once. To add multiple
drive enclosures, repeat the procedure for all the drive enclosures to
be added.
Refer to "4.1 Storage System Status" (page 44) for component status
display.
285
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 7 Maintenance
7.1 Hot Expansion
7.1.1
Add Drive Enclosure
The [Add Drive Enclosure] function can expand the drive enclosure while the ETERNUS DX60/
DX80/DX90 is operating.
If expansion fails due to an error or problem, the expansion can be restarted from the interrupted
point by starting this function again and recovering the failed expansion parts. However, when
disk operation is not normal, maintenance is required.
The procedure to add a drive enclosure in hot mode is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Add Drive Enclosure] under the [Hardware Maintenance] menu on the
[Maintenance] tab.
→ The [Add Drive Enclosure] screen appears.
2
Click the [Next >] button.
→ The procedure to add DE is displayed.
286
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 7 Maintenance
7.1 Hot Expansion
3
Install the drive enclosure in the rack according to the displayed procedure, and
click the [Next >] button.
→ The expanded components identification process starts.
287
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 7 Maintenance
7.1 Hot Expansion
4
Confirm the "Auto Power" switch for the target drive enclosure is "OFF", and
click the [Next >] button.
→ The [Add Drive Enclosure] procedure is completed.
5
Click the [OK] button.
End of procedure
288
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 8
Display and Download Information
(Diagnosis)
This chapter describes how to display and download ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 related information.
8.1
Display Event Log
The [Display Event Log] function records and displays the event history of the ETERNUS DX60/
DX80/DX90 as an event log.
The event log is one of the internal logs stored in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90. The event
log contains a history of events that are related to set the information changes, such as module
failures and volume creation.
Up to 800 (400 per a CM) event logs can be displayed. Once the recorded event log is no longer
necessary, it can also be deleted.
Even after deleting internal logs using the "8.2 Export/Delete Log" (page
290) function, the event log remains in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90.
The procedure to display the event log is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Display Event Log] menu on the [Diagnosis] tab.
→ The [Display Event Log] screen appears.
289
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 8 Display and Download Information (Diagnosis)
8.2 Export/Delete Log
• Click the [Delete] button to delete the event log.
• Click the [Refresh] button to obtain the latest event log.
• Daylight saving time is applied for the date and time, and "DST" is
displayed for the logs of events that occur during the daylight
saving time period that is specified in "6.4.1 Modify Date and
Time" (page 235).
End of procedure
8.2
Export/Delete Log
The [Export/Delete Log] function exports and saves the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90
maintenance information (log) according to user-specified time. An exported log can be stored
on a floppy disk or hard disk, or sent by mail. Also users can select a log segment size in
accordance with save destination.
● The maintenance information to be exported
Logs include an internal log and setup information.
• Internal log
Detected errors, warnings, and traces.
• Setup information
The setup information exported from the device.
• The internal log and setup information cannot be exported separately.
The procedure to export log information is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Export/Delete Log] menu on the [Diagnosis] tab.
→ The [Export/Delete Log] screen appears.
2
Set the following items and click the [Export] button.
• Specify Time Range
Select whether to specify the time range with "Yes" or "No", or select the "Last 24
hours" radio button.
• Start Time
When a time range is to be specified, specify the date and time to start exporting logs.
• End Time
When a time range is to be specified, specify the date and time to end exporting logs.
• Include Expander log
Select whether to export the Expander log with the "Yes" or "No" radio button.
290
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 8 Display and Download Information (Diagnosis)
8.2 Export/Delete Log
• Log File Size
Select the log segment size when saving the exported log.
- Non-segmentation
- 4.27MB
- 1.44MB (Floppy Disk)
- 640KB (E-Mail)
• Delete of Customer Information
Select whether to delete the customer information with the "Yes" or "No" radio button.
In the following conditions, an error screen appears.
• When the input date and/or time are not valid (For example:
February 31st)
• When the end time is earlier than the start time
→ A confirmation screen appears.
3
Click the [OK] button.
→ The log is exported.
After exporting log completes, a dialog box to download the log file appears.
291
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 8 Display and Download Information (Diagnosis)
8.2 Export/Delete Log
4
Click the [Download] button to save the exported log.
After exporting the log completes, save the log file immediately.
5
Save the log file.
• Take care so that the segments are not overwritten.
• When exporting segmented log files, make sure to export the
segment within five minutes. If five minutes passes before
exporting the next segment, exporting the log fails. After saving
one segment is finished, save the next segment immediately.
→ If the log file is segmented, download and save the next segment (save all the
segmented files).
When "Non-segmentation" is selected in the "Log File Size" field, the
[Download] button described in Step 4 becomes inactive after the
save process of the log file completes.
6
Click the [Finish] button.
→ Exporting log is completed.
After exporting the log completes, make sure to perform "8.3 Export
Panic Dump" (page 293).
End of procedure
292
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 8 Display and Download Information (Diagnosis)
8.3 Export Panic Dump
8.3
Export Panic Dump
"Panic Dump" is the action of outputting (dump) memory information when an error (panic)
occurs, and also the name of the output information itself. This function exports and saves the
memory information of the controller that is stored in the panic dump data, in a segment size
specified by the user. An exported panic dump can be stored on a floppy disk or hard disk, or
sent by mail.
Panic dump data is used to analyze the cause of a firmware abnormality or hardware error.
• This function cannot be used when there is no panic dump to be
exported in the device.
• Two panic dumps are stored per CM, and four per device. When all four
panic dumps in the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 are stored within the
last 14 days, a new panic dump cannot be saved.
The procedure to export panic dump is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Export Panic Dump] menu on the [Diagnosis] tab.
→ The [Export Panic Dump] screen appears.
293
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 8 Display and Download Information (Diagnosis)
8.3 Export Panic Dump
2
Set the following items, and click the [Export] button.
• Panic Dumps
Select panic dump to be exported from the list displayed in the screen.
• Option
- Dump File Segment Size
Select the dump file segment size to save the obtained panic dump.
• Non-segmentation
• 4.27MB
• 1.44MB (Floppy Disk)
• 640KB (E-Mail)
→ A confirmation screen appears.
3
Click the [OK] button.
→ The selected panic dump is exported.
After the panic dump export is finished, a screen to execute saving the panic dump is
displayed.
294
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 8 Display and Download Information (Diagnosis)
8.3 Export Panic Dump
4
Click the [Download] button to save the exported panic dump.
When exporting a panic dump file is finished, save the panic dump
file.
5
Save the panic dump.
→ When the panic dump file is segmented, download and save the next segment (save all
the segmented files).
• Take care so that the segments are not overwritten.
• When exporting segmented panic dump files, make sure to export
the segment within five minutes. If five minutes passes before
exporting the next segment, exporting the panic dump fails. After
saving one segment is finished, save the next segment
immediately.
When "Non-segmentation" is selected in the "Dump File Segment
Size" field, the [Download] button described in Step 4 becomes
inactive after the save process of the panic dump file completes.
End of procedure
295
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 8 Display and Download Information (Diagnosis)
8.4 Start/Stop Performance Monitoring
8.4
Start/Stop Performance Monitoring
GUI contains a function that acquires performance information and displays the result.
The [Start/Stop Performance Monitoring] function is used to start/stop acquiring the ETERNUS
DX60/DX80/DX90 performance information.
Acquired information can be checked using the "8.5 Display Performance Information" (page
299) function.
• When the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 is rebooted, monitoring
performance process is stopped.
• When other monitoring software, such as ETERNUS SF Storage
Cruiser, is controlling performance information, performance information
cannot be acquired using GUI.
The procedure to start/stop acquiring performance information is as follows:
Start Performance Monitoring
Procedure
1
Click the [Start/Stop Performance Monitoring] menu on the [Diagnosis] tab.
→ The [Start/Stop Performance Monitoring] screen appears.
2
Specify the following item, and click the [Start] button.
• Monitoring State
Current status of performance information acquisition operation is displayed.
• Interval (sec.)
Input the interval to acquire the performance information between 30 and 300 (sec.) in
units of 30 seconds.
→ A confirmation screen appears.
296
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 8 Display and Download Information (Diagnosis)
8.4 Start/Stop Performance Monitoring
3
Click the [OK] button.
→ Acquisition of performance information is started.
End of procedure
Stop Performance Monitoring
Procedure
1
Click the [Start/Stop Performance Monitoring] menu on the [Diagnosis] tab.
→ The [Start/Stop Performance Monitoring] screen appears.
2
Click the [Stop] button.
→ A confirmation screen appears.
297
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 8 Display and Download Information (Diagnosis)
8.4 Start/Stop Performance Monitoring
3
Click the [OK] button.
→ Acquisition of performance information is stopped.
End of procedure
298
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 8 Display and Download Information (Diagnosis)
8.5 Display Performance Information
8.5
Display Performance Information
The [Display Performance Information] function displays performance information related to the
Host I/O, Advanced Copy, disks, CM, and host port, which is obtained by the Master CM in
advance. By collecting the CM (CPU) usage rate in the device and busy ratio of the disk, operating conditions and work load in the device can be checked.
The performance information acquisition operation must be started by
using the "8.4 Start/Stop Performance Monitoring" (page 296) function or
other monitoring software (such as ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser) in
advance.
The procedure to display the performance information is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Display Performance Information] menu on the [Diagnosis] tab.
→ The [Display Performance Information] menu appears.
Click the tree view on the left of the screen to display information for each component.
• Click the [Save] button to save the performance information.
• Click the [Refresh] button to obtain the latest information.
End of procedure
299
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 8 Display and Download Information (Diagnosis)
8.6 Display Error Information
8.6
Display Error Information
The [Display Error Information] function displays the total number of errors for disks and ports.
An increasing number of error occurrences in the information is used to indicate early replacement of warning status components, and for analysis information when performance degradation
occurs.
Also, deleting unnecessary disk error information can be deleted.
The procedure to display error information is as follows:
Procedure
1
Click the [Display Error Information] menu on the [Diagnosis] tab.
→ The [Display Error Information] screen appears.
Click the link on the left of the screen, and display the [Disk Error Statistics] screen and
[Port Error Statistics] screen.
- Disk Error Statistics
• The [Clear Statistics] targeting checkboxes are only provided for
disks with error information. To clear the error information for
each disk, select the checkbox for the target disk and click the
[Clear Statistics] button.
• To clear the error information for all the disks, click the [Clear All
Statistics] button.
• Click the [Refresh] button to obtain the latest information.
300
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Chapter 8 Display and Download Information (Diagnosis)
8.6 Display Error Information
- Port Error Statistics
End of procedure
301
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Appendix A Install Site Certificate
This chapter describes how to install the web-site certificate.
This chapter provides an example of when using Internet Explorer and Firefox.
A.1
For Internet Explorer
This section describes the procedure to install security certificate.
The procedure to install security certificate for Internet Explorer 7 is as follows:
When using Internet Explorer 8, register the URL of the ETERNUS DX60/
DX80/DX90 in "Trusted Sites" before installing the security certificate.
Use the Internet Option and specify the URL to be used for connecting to
the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 (https://IP address of the ETERNUS
DX60/DX80/DX90) to the "Trusted Sites".
Procedure
1
Enter the URL to the address bar in the web browser.
Specify "https://IP address of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90" (Default IP address is
"192.168.1.1").
→ A confirmation screen for security certificate appears.
302
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Appendix A Install Site Certificate
A.1 For Internet Explorer
2
Click the "Continue to this website (not recommended)" link.
→ The logon screen for GUI is displayed.
3
Click the "Certificate Error".
→ A warning message appears.
303
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Appendix A Install Site Certificate
A.1 For Internet Explorer
4
Click the "View Certificates" link.
→ The site certificate information appears.
5
Click the [Install Certificate] button.
→ The "Certificate Import Wizard" appears.
6
Click the [Next >] button.
304
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Appendix A Install Site Certificate
A.1 For Internet Explorer
7
Select "Place all certificates in the following store".
→ The "Select Certificate Store" screen appears.
If "Automatically select the certificate store based on the type of
certificate" is selected in the "Certificate Import Wizard", an error may
occur in the security certificate according to the customer
environment.
8
Select the "Trusted Root Certification Authorities", and click the [OK] button.
9
Click the [Finish] button.
→ The "Security Warning" dialog box appears.
305
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Appendix A Install Site Certificate
A.1 For Internet Explorer
10 Click the [Yes] button.
After clicking the [No] button, the operation may not be continuable.
If this occurs, restart the web browser.
→ The completion screen appears.
11 Click the [OK] button.
→ The security certificate is installed. Restart the web browser.
End of procedure
306
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Appendix A Install Site Certificate
A.2 For Firefox
A.2
For Firefox
This section provides the procedure to install the security certificate.
The example when installing security certificate for Firefox 3.0.8 is as follows:
Procedure
1
Enter the URL to the address bar in the web browser.
Specify "https://IP address of the ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90" (Default IP address is
"192.168.1.1").
→ A confirmation screen for security certificate appears.
2
Click the "Or you can add an exception..." link.
307
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Appendix A Install Site Certificate
A.2 For Firefox
3
Click the [Add Exception...] button.
→ The [Add Exception] screen appears.
4
Click the [Get Certificate] button.
→ The status of certificate is displayed.
308
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Appendix A Install Site Certificate
A.2 For Firefox
5
Click the [Confirm Security Exception] button.
→ The security certificate is installed. Restart the web browser.
End of procedure
309
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Appendix B Factory Default List
The following shows the factory default settings.
Item
Contents
Setting value
Setting range
Set
Eco-mode
Schedule
Eco-mode General Setting
Eco-mode
Disable
Modify Copy
Parameters
Policy Level 1 (Informational) of
Snap Data Pool
Threshold
(%)
50
1 − 97
Policy Level 2 (Warning) of
Snap Data Pool
Threshold
(%)
70
2 − 98
Policy Level 3 (Error) of
Snap Data Pool
Threshold
(%)
99
3 − 99
Modify EC/
OPC Priority
EC/OPC Priority
Automatic
Priority
• Enable
• Disable
• Automatic
Priority
• High Priority
• Low Priority
Modify Copy
Table Size
Advanced Copy feature enabled
On
• On
• Off
Copy Table Size
x1
•
•
•
•
•
Resolution
Table Size
(MB)
Create Copy
Path
Modify Port
Mode
Select Copy
Path
Set Line
x1
x2
x4
x8
x16
ETERNUS
DX60
0
0 − 64 (MB)
ETERNUS
DX80/DX90
0
0 − 128 (MB)
Connection
Type
Direct
Link Speed
(Mbit/s)
0
1 − 65535
(Mbit/s)
Compression
Ratio (%)
0
0 − 99 (%)
Port Mode
CA
• Remote
• Direct
• CA
• RA
310
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Appendix B Factory Default List
Item
Contents
Setup User
Account
User Role
Advanced
Standard
Setup
Network
Environment
Interface
Speed and
Duplex
Setting value
Setting range
User Name
f.ce
4 − 16
alphanumeric
characters and
symbols ('!', '-', '_',
'.')
Password
Check code +
Serial No.
(default)
4 − 16
alphanumeric
characters and
symbols ('!', '-', '_',
'.')
User Name
root
4 − 16
alphanumeric
characters and
symbols ('!', '-', '_',
'.')
Password
root
4 − 16
alphanumeric
characters and
symbols ('!', '-', '_',
'.')
MNT
Auto
Negotiation
• Auto
Negotiation
•
•
•
•
•
RMT
Auto
Negotiation
1Gbit/s
100Mbit/s Half
100Mbit/s Full
10Mbit/s Half
10Mbit/s Full
• Auto
Negotiation
•
•
•
•
•
1Gbit/s
100Mbit/s Half
100Mbit/s Full
10Mbit/s Half
10Mbit/s Full
Master CM
IP Address
MNT
192.168.1.1
0 − 255
RMT
0.0.0.0
0 − 255
Slave CM IP
Address
MNT
0.0.0.0
0 − 255
RMT
0.0.0.0
0 − 255
Subnet
Mask
MNT
255.255.255.0
0 − 255
RMT
0.0.0.0
0 − 255
Default
Gateway
MNT
0.0.0.0
0 − 255
RMT
0.0.0.0
0 − 255
Primary
DNS
MNT
0.0.0.0
0 − 255
RMT
0.0.0.0
0 − 255
Secondary
DNS
MNT
0.0.0.0
0 − 255
RMT
0.0.0.0
0 − 255
311
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Appendix B Factory Default List
Item
Contents
Setup
Network
Environment
Interface
http
https
telnet
SSH
Maintenance
Maintenance
-Secure
ICMP
Allowed IP List
IP Address
Subnet
Mask
Setup SNMP
Agent
(Basic
Interface)
Set Basic
Interface
Setting value
Setting range
MNT
Enable
• Enable
• Disable
RMT
Enable
• Enable
• Disable
MNT
Enable
• Enable
• Disable
RMT
Enable
• Enable
• Disable
MNT
Enable
• Enable
• Disable
RMT
Enable
• Enable
• Disable
MNT
Enable
• Enable
• Disable
RMT
Enable
• Enable
• Disable
MNT
Enable
• Enable
• Disable
RMT
Enable
• Enable
• Disable
MNT
Disable
• Enable
• Disable
RMT
Disable
• Enable
• Disable
MNT
Enable
• Enable
• Disable
RMT
Enable
• Enable
• Disable
MNT
0.0.0.0
0 − 255
RMT
0.0.0.0
0 − 255
MNT
0.0.0.0
0 − 255
RMT
0.0.0.0
0 − 255
SNMP Function
Disable
• Enable
• Disable
LAN Port used for SNMP
MNT
• MNT
• RMT
Authentication Failure
Send SNMP
Trap
• Send SNMP
Trap
• Do not send
SNMP Trap
312
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Appendix B Factory Default List
Item
Contents
Setup SNMP
Agent
(Basic
Interface)
Set Basic
Interface
Setup E-Mail
Notification
Notification
E-Mail
Notification
Setting range
• Notification
• Not
notification
Mail Server
Settings
Retry Setting
Setup
Remote
Support
Setting value
Abnormal parts during
maintenance
Communication
Environment
Information
Notification E-Mail
Disable
Destination E-Mail Address
−
LAN Port used for SMTP
Connection
MNT
Sender E-Mail Address
−
SMTP Server
−
SMTP Port No.
25
SMTP requires
authentication
None
User Name
−
Password
−
Authentication Method
Automatic
• Enable
• Disable
Up to five
addresses
• MNT
• RMT
1 − 65535
• None
• AUTH SMTP
•
•
•
•
Automatic
CRAM-MD5
PLAIN
LOGIN
Maximum Retries
0
0 or 1
Retry Interval (sec.)
1
0 − 5 (sec.)
Connection
Internet
Connection
Connection
Type
• Internet
Connection
• Internet
Connection
(Mail only)
• P-P
Connection
• P-P
Connection
(Mail only)
• P-P
Connection
(VPN
Connection)
• P-P
Connection
(VPN
Connection
Mail only)
LAN Port
used for
Remote
Support
MNT
• MNT
• RMT
313
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Appendix B Factory Default List
Item
Setup
Remote
Support
Contents
Communication
Environment
Information
Service
Setting value
Scheduled
Connection
Time
Undefined
(10:00 - 15:00)
Scheduled
Connection
Period
Every Day
Setting range
00:00 − 23:59
(*1)
• Every Day
• Every Day
(except
Sunday)
• Every Day
(except
Saturday and
Sunday)
• Once
per Week
Specify the
Day of the
Week
Proxy Server
Storage System
E-Mail
Configuration
SMTP
Authentication
Information
Sunday
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Sunday
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
Proxy Server
−
Up to 63 alphanumeric characters
and symbols
Port No.
0
0 − 65535
(numerals)
SMTP Server
−
Up to 63 alphanumeric characters
and symbols
Port No.
25
0 − 65535
(numerals)
Sender Mail Address
−
Up to 63 alphanumeric characters
and symbols
Authentication Type
No SMTP
Authentication
• No SMTP
Authentication
• POP Before
SMTP
Authentication
• AUTH SMTP
Authentication
Authentication Method
Automatic
•
•
•
•
Automatic
CRAM-MD5
PLAIN
LOGIN
314
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Appendix B Factory Default List
Item
Setup
Remote
Support
Contents
SMTP
Authentication
Information
REMCS Center
Setting value
Setting range
POP Server
−
Up to 63 alphanumeric characters
and symbols
Port No.
0
0 − 65535
(numerals)
REMCS Center
REMCS
Center
• Fujitsu
America
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Australia
Brazil
Hong-Kong
China
Indonesia
Korea
Malaysia
Philippine
Singapore
Taiwan
Thailand
Vietnam
Individual
support in
Hawaii
• OSC
• Direct Input
Setting
Detailed
Configuration
Information
HTTP Server
−
Up to 63 alphanumeric characters
and symbols
Port No.
0
0 − 65535
(numerals)
Receiver Mail Address
−
Up to 63 alphanumeric characters
and symbols
Mail Message Fragmentation
Setting
Enable
Message
Fragmentation
• Enable
Message
Fragmentation
• Disable
Message
Fragmentation
64
Specify Storage System
Name for HELO/EHLO
Announcement when
Sending Mail
Do not specify
−
64 − 6400 (KB)
• Specify
• Do not specify
Up to 32 alphanumeric characters
and symbols
315
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Appendix B Factory Default List
Item
Setup
Remote
Support
Setup Log
Sending
Parameters
Contents
Time
Information
Configure
Automatic Log
Transmission
Setting value
Change following Timing
Parameter items
Not selected
SMTP Response Timeout
(sec.)
60
Setting range
• Selected
• Not selected
1 − 3600
(numerals)
SMTP Retry Count
5
1 − 60
SMTP Retry Interval (sec.)
30
1 − 3600
(numerals)
HTTP Timeout (sec.)
30
1 − 3600
(numerals)
HTTP Retry Count
5
1 − 60
HTTP Retry Interval (sec.)
5
1 − 3600
(numerals)
Queue Time before Sending
Mails (msec.)
(only when POP Before
SMTP authentication is
enabled)
1000
1 − 3600
(numerals)
Send Log
based on
Events
Send Log
when Errors
Occur
Send
• Send
• Not selected
Send Log
Periodically
Enable
Periodical
Transmission
of Log.
Selected
• Selected
• Not selected
Time
Undefined
(10:00 - 15:00)
00:00 − 23:59
(*1)
Period
Once
per Week
• Every Day
• Once
per Week
Day of the
Week
Setup Event
Notification
Setting based
on Severity
All Error Events
Undefined
(any day from
Monday to
Friday) (*1)
Selected
Select from
Monday to Fri day.
• E-Mail
• SNMP Trap
• Host Sense
Key Code
Qualifier
• REMCS
All Warning Events
Selected
• E-Mail
• SNMP Trap
• Host Sense
Key Code
Qualifier
All Informational Events
Not selected
• E-Mail
• SNMP Trap
316
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Appendix B Factory Default List
Item
Setup Event
Notification
Contents
Error Severity
Level
Disk was broken
Setting value
Selected
Setting range
• E-Mail
• SNMP Trap
• Host Sense
Key Code
Qualifier
Broken Disk (when HS<0)
Not selected
• E-Mail
• SNMP Trap
• Host Sense
Key Code
Qualifier
Module was broken
Selected
• E-Mail
• SNMP Trap
• Host Sense
Key Code
Qualifier
Remote Path Error
Selected
• E-Mail
• SNMP Trap
• Host Sense
Key Code
Qualifier
• REMCS
REC Buffer Halt (Path Error)
Selected
• E-Mail
• SNMP Trap
• REMCS
REC Buffer Halt (Overload)
Selected
• E-Mail
• SNMP Trap
• REMCS
REC Buffer Halt (Error)
Selected
• E-Mail
• SNMP Trap
• REMCS
Copy Session Error
Not selected
• E-Mail
• SNMP Trap
• REMCS
317
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Appendix B Factory Default List
Item
Setup Event
Notification
Contents
Warning Level
Disk reported a Warning
Setting value
Selected
Setting range
• E-Mail
• SNMP Trap
• Host Sense
Key Code
Qualifier
Warning Disk (when HS<0)
Not selected
• E-Mail
• SNMP Trap
• Host Sense
Key Code
Qualifier
Module reported a Warning
Selected
• E-Mail
• SNMP Trap
• Host Sense
Key Code
Qualifier
RAID Degradation Event
Selected
• E-Mail
• SNMP Trap
• Host Sense
Key Code
Qualifier
RAID Degradation Event
(when HS<0)
Not selected
• E-Mail
• SNMP Trap
• Host Sense
Key Code
Qualifier
RAID Recovery Event
Selected
• Host Sense
Key Code
Qualifier
Recovery from Error
Not selected
• SNMP Trap
Blink Panel Fault LED
Enable
• Enable
• Disable
318
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Appendix B Factory Default List
Item
Setup Event
Notification
Contents
Informational
Level
Setting value
Setting range
Power on Completed
Not selected
• E-Mail
• SNMP Trap
Controller Firmware updated
Not selected
• E-Mail
• SNMP Trap
Created RAID Group
Not selected
• E-Mail
• SNMP Trap
Deleted RAID Group
Not selected
• E-Mail
• SNMP Trap
RAID Group Name Changed
Not selected
• E-Mail
• SNMP Trap
Assigned Hot Spare
Not selected
• E-Mail
• SNMP Trap
Released Hot Spare
Not selected
• E-Mail
• SNMP Trap
Created Volume
Not selected
• E-Mail
• SNMP Trap
Deleted Volume
Not selected
• E-Mail
• SNMP Trap
Volume Name Changed
Not selected
• E-Mail
• SNMP Trap
FC/iSCSI/SAS Port
Parameters Changed
Not selected
• E-Mail
• SNMP Trap
FC/iSCSI/SAS Host
Information Changed
Not selected
• E-Mail
• SNMP Trap
Host Name Defined
Not selected
• E-Mail
• SNMP Trap
LUN Mapping Changed
Not selected
• E-Mail
• SNMP Trap
Host Response Changed
Not selected
• E-Mail
• SNMP Trap
Reset Group Changed
Not selected
• E-Mail
• SNMP Trap
Error condition defined by
SDP policy
Not selected
• E-Mail
• SNMP Trap
Warning condition defined by
SDP policy
Not selected
• E-Mail
• SNMP Trap
Informational message
defined by SDP policy
Not selected
• E-Mail
• SNMP Trap
319
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Appendix B Factory Default List
Item
Modify Date
and Time
Contents
Time Zone
Setting value
Setting range
Depending on
the factory
settings
• (GMT-12:00)
Eniwetok,
Kwajalein
• (GMT-11:00)
Samoa
• (GMT-10:00)
Honolulu
• (GMT-09:00)
Alaska
• (GMT-08:00)
Los Angeles,
San Francisco,
San Diego
• (GMT-07:00)
Phoenix,
Calgary,
Denver
• (GMT-06:00)
Chicago,
Mexico City
• (GMT-05:00)
New York,
Bogota
• (GMT-04:00)
Caracas
• (GMT-03:30)
Newfoundland
• (GMT-03:00)
Sao Paulo,
Brasilia
• (GMT-02:00)
Mid-Atlantic
• (GMT-01:00)
Azores Island,
Cape Verde
• (GMT+00:00)
Dublin,
London,
Manchester,
Lisbon
• (GMT+01:00)
Paris, Madrid,
Stockholm
• (GMT+01:00)
Rome,
Vienna, Berlin
• (GMT+01:00)
Milan,
Amsterdam
320
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Appendix B Factory Default List
Item
Modify Date
and Time
Contents
Time Zone
Setting value
Setting range
Depending on
the factory
settings
• (GMT+02:00)
Athens,
Helsinki, Cairo
• (GMT+02:00)
Beirut,
Cape Town
• (GMT+03:00)
Nairobi,
Moscow
• (GMT+04:00)
Abu Dhabi
• (GMT+05:00)
Islamabad,
Karachi
• (GMT+05:30)
New Delhi
• (GMT+06:00)
Dhaka
• (GMT+07:00)
Bangkok,
Jakarta
• (GMT+08:00)
Hong Kong,
Manila,
Singapore
• (GMT+08:00)
Beijing, Taipei,
Kuala Lumpur, Perth
• (GMT+09:00)
Tokyo, Osaka,
Kyoto,
Fukuoka,
Sapporo
• (GMT+09:00)
Seoul
• (GMT+09:30)
Adelaide
• (GMT+10:00)
Guam,
Sydney,
Melbourne
• (GMT+11:00)
Solomon
Islands,
New
Caledonia
• (GMT+12:00)
Wellington,
Auckland, Fiji
• Manually
321
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Appendix B Factory Default List
Item
Modify Date
and Time
Modify
Storage
System
Name
Contents
Setting value
Setting range
Daylight Saving Time
Depending on
the factory
settings
• ON
• OFF
NTP Service
NTP server
Depending on
the factory
settings
• NTP enabled
• NTP disabled
LAN Port used for NTP
Depending on
the factory
settings
• MNT
• RMT
Name
−
1 − 16
alphanumeric
characters,
symbols (except ','
and '?', and '%
used as the first
letter'), and blanks
Installation Location
−
1 − 50
alphanumeric
characters,
symbols (except ','
and '?', and '%
used as the first
letter'), and blanks
Administrator
−
1 − 50
alphanumeric
characters,
symbols (except ','
and '?', and '%
used as the first
letter'), and blanks
Description
−
1 − 50
alphanumeric
characters,
symbols (except ','
and '?', and '%
used as the first
letter'), and blanks
Set the Name of
this Storage
System
Setup
Encryption
Mode
Encryption Mode
Disable
Change Box
ID
Box ID
Depending on
the device
• Enable
• Disable
40 alphabetic
characters (upper
case), numerals,
and symbols (’#’)
322
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Appendix B Factory Default List
Item
Contents
Setup Power
Management
Shutdown by
External Power
Management
Unit
Setting value
Enable
Not selected
Delay until Shutdown (min.)
0
Set management unit
interface
PMAN
Setting range
• CM#0
• CM#1
0 − 15 (minutes)
• Power
Synchronized
Unit
• PMAN
• Manual
Setup
Subsystem
Parameters
Set FC Port
Parameters
(for "CA" port
mode)
Power Failure Signal
Positive
• Positive
• Negative
Low Battery Signal
Positive
• Positive
• Negative
UPS Shutdown Signal
Not selected
• Enable
• Not selected
Positive
• Positive
• Negative
Load Balance
Selected
• Selected
• Not selected
Reject INQUIRY from Unauthorized Host
Not selected
• Selected
• Not selected
Checkcode Enforcement
Not selected
• Selected
• Not selected
Internal Bus Recovery
Not selected
• Selected
• Not selected
Connection
FC-AL
• Fabric
• FC-AL
Set Loop ID
Manual
• Manual
• Auto
Loop ID
Manual
0
Auto
Ascending
Last 2 digits of
0x00 to 0x7D
• Ascending
• Descending
323
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Appendix B Factory Default List
Item
Contents
Set FC Port
Parameters
(for "CA" port
mode)
Setting value
Transfer Rate (Gbit/s)
Auto
Negotiation
Setting range
• For 4Gbit/s
models
- Auto
Negotiation
- 1
- 2
- 4
• For 8Gbit/s
models
- Auto
Negotiation
- 2
- 4
- 8
Frame Size (bytes)
2048
• 2048
• 1024
• 512
Host Affinity
Disable
• Enable
• Disable
Host Response
0:Default
• 0:Default
• Host
Response
(Number:
Name)
Set FC Port
Parameters
(for "RA" port
mode)
Reset Scope
I_T_L
• I_T_L
• T_L
Release Reservation if Chip is Reset
Disable
• Enable
• Disable
Connection
FC-AL
• Fabric
• FC-AL
Set Loop ID
Manual
• Manual
• Auto
Loop ID
Manual
0
Auto
Ascending
• Ascending
• Descending
Auto
Negotiation
• Auto
Transfer Rate (Gbit/s)
Last 2 digits of
0x00 to 0x7D
Negotiation
• 2
• 4
• 8
324
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Appendix B Factory Default List
Item
Set iSCSI
Port
Parameters
Contents
TCP/IP Settings
Setting value
Setting range
0 − 255
IP Address
192.168.x.y
Subnet Mask
255.255.255.0
0 − 255
(255.255.255.255
is not allowed)
0 − 255
(*2)
iSCSI Settings
Default Gateway
0.0.0.0
iSNS Server
Disable
iSCSI Name
iqn.200009.com.fujitsu:
storagesystem.eternu
s-dxl:00xxxxxx
Alias Name
−
Host Affinity
Disable
• Enable
• Disable
Host Response
0:Default
• 0:Default
• Host
• Enable
• Disable
4 − 223
alphanumeric
characters and
symbols ('-', ':', '.')
(*3)
General
Settings
1 − 31
alphanumeric
characters,
symbols, and
blanks
Response
(Number:
Name)
Jumbo Frame
Disable
• Enable
• Disable
Transfer Rate
1Gbit/s
• Auto
Negotiation
• 100Mbit/s
• 1Gbit/s
Reset Scope
I_T_L
• I_T_L
• T_L
Release Reservation if Chip
is Reset
Disable
• Enable
• Disable
325
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Appendix B Factory Default List
Item
Contents
Set iSCSI
Port
Parameters
Security
Set SAS Port
Parameters
Port Settings
Setting value
Setting range
CHAP
OFF
CHAP User Name
−
1 − 255
alphanumeric
characters,
symbols, and
blanks
Password
−
12 − 100
alphanumeric
characters,
symbols, and
blanks
New Password
−
12 − 100
alphanumeric
characters,
symbols, and
blanks
Confirm new Password
−
12 − 100
alphanumeric
characters,
symbols, and
blanks
Header Digest
OFF
• OFF
• CRC32C
Data Digest
OFF
• OFF
• CRC32C
Host Affinity
Disable
• Enable
• Disable
Host Response
0:Default
• 0:Default
• Host
• ON
• OFF
Response
(Number:
Name)
Setup Host
Response
Reset Scope
I_T_L
• I_T_L
• T_L
Release Reservation if Chip
is Reset
Disable
• Enable
• Disable
Response Name
0:Default
Byte-0 of Inquiry Response
No
Conversion
(Default)
1 − 16
alphanumeric
characters,
symbols (except ','
and '?', and '%
used as the first
letter'), and blanks
• No
Conversion
(Default)
• Custom
326
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Appendix B Factory Default List
Item
Setup Host
Response
Contents
Inquiry VPD ID Type
Setting value
Setting range
Type1 + Type3
(Default)
• Type1 + Type3
(Default)
• Type1
• Type3
Inquiry Standard Data Version
Version 5
(Default)
• Version 5
(Default)
• Version 4
• Version 3
Command Timeout Interval
Default
(25sec.)
• Default
(25sec.)
• Customize
(10 - 255 sec.)
(numerals)
Load Balance Response
[Disable] Unit
Attention
(Default)
• [Disable] Unit
Attention
(Default)
• [Disable] Busy
• [Disable]
Queue Full
Reservation Conflict Response for Test Unit
Ready
Normal
(Default)
Change Volume Mapping
No Report
(Default)
• Normal
(Default)
• Conflict
• No Report
(Default)
• Report
Volume Capacity Expansion
No Report
(Default)
• No Report
(Default)
• Report
Vendor Unique Sense Code
No Report
(Default)
• No Report
(Default)
• Report
Host Specific Mode
Normal
(Default)
• Normal
(Default)
• AIX Mode
• HP-UX Mode
Asymmetric / Symmetric Logical Unit Access
ACTIVEACTIVE /
PREFERRED
_PATH
(Default)
• ACTIVEACTIVE /
PREFERRED
_PATH
(Default)
• ACTIVE /
ACTIVE
Unrecoverable Sense Report Mode
Disable
(Default)
• Disable
(Default)
• Enable
327
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Appendix B Factory Default List
Item
Contents
Setup Host
Response
Sense Data Conversion
Setting value
No
Conversion
(Default)
Setting range
• No
Conversion
(Default)
• Linux Recommended
(When not
using
GRMPD)
• Windows Recommended
(When not
using GR/
ETERNUS
MPD or
Device Driver)
• Customize
−
SK/ASC/ASCQ
• SK:
Sense Key
• ASC:
Additional
Sense Code
• ASCQ:
Additional
Sense Code
Qualifier
Modify Reset
Group
*1:
*2:
*3:
Set Reset Group
Different reset
groups for
each port
Different values are specified in the factory settings in order to distribute the load on the REMCS
center.
"x" in the setting value indicates the CM number. Values for "y" vary depending on the port number.
CM0 Port-0 : 192.168.2.64
CM0 Port-1 : 192.168.2.65
CM1 Port-0 : 192.168.3.66
CM1 Port-1 : 192.168.3.67
"x" in the setting value indicates a specific 6-digit number that is assigned to each ETERNUS DX60/
DX80.
328
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Appendix C The Maximum Number of Concurrent
Volume Formats
The maximum number of concurrent volume formats (*1) differs depending on RAID levels, volume capacity, and the model. If 80 or more 2TB disks have been installed in the ETERNUS
DX80/DX90, the maximum number of concurrent volume formats may be exceeded. In this case,
an error message appears.
Use the following procedure to check the maximum number of concurrent volume formats.
Calculate the corresponding value for each formatting volume. When the total of corresponding
values for all the formatting volumes is smaller than the maximum value, concurrent volume formats are available.
*1:
Includes the volume format that is performed automatically when creating a new volume.
Procedure
1
Calculate the corresponding value for each formatting volume.
Use the following formula to calculate the value for each volume to be formatted.
Corresponding Value for each Volume = Volume Capacity (MB) / Coefficient
Volume capacity:
The capacity of the volume to be formatted (MB).
Coefficient
The following table shows the coefficient for each RAID level where the target volume
is registered.
RAID1
1D+1D
Coefficient
4
RAID1+0
Coefficient
RAID5
Coefficient
2D+2D
4
2D+1P
4
3D+3D
6
3D+1P
6
4D+4D
8
4D+1P
8
5D+5D
5
5D+1P
5
6D+6D
6
6D+1P
6
7D+7D
7
7D+1P
7
8D+8D
8
8D+1P
8
9D+9D
4.5
9D+1P
4.5
10D+10D
5
10D+1P
5
11D+11D
5.5
11D+1P
5.5
12D+12D
6
12D+1P
6
13D+13D
6.5
13D+1P
6.5
14D+14D
7
14D+1P
7
15D+15D
7.5
15D+1P
7.5
16D+16D
8
329
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Appendix C The Maximum Number of Concurrent Volume Formats
RAID5+0
2
Coefficient
RAID6
Coefficient
(2D+1P) × 2
8
3D+2P
6
(3D+1P) × 2
12
4D+2P
8
(4D+1P) × 2
16
5D+2P
5
(5D+1P) × 2
10
6D+2P
6
(6D+1P) × 2
12
7D+2P
7
(7D+1P) × 2
14
8D+2P
8
(8D+1P) × 2
16
9D+2P
4.5
(9D+1P) × 2
9
10D+2P
5
(10D+1P) × 2
10
11D+2P
5.5
(11D+1P) × 2
11
12D+2P
6
(12D+1P) × 2
12
13D+2P
6.5
(13D+1P) × 2
13
14D+2P
7
(14D+1P) × 2
14
(15D+1P) × 2
15
Compare the total of the corresponding values and the maximum number of
concurrent volume formats.
If the total of the corresponding values is smaller than the maximum value, concurrent
volume formats are available.
Total of Corresponding Values < Maximum Value
The total of corresponding values:
Add up the corresponding values for each volume.
The maximum value of concurrent volume formats:
The following table shows the maximum value of concurrent volume formats for each
model.
The maximum value: 33,554,432
End of procedure
The following table shows an example when formatting volumes in the RAID5(5D+1P) in which
the capacity is 9,331,200MB.
Number of volumes
Formula and corresponding value
Concurrent
volume format
17
(9,331,200 / 5) × 17 = 31,726,080
Available
18
(9,331,200 / 5) × 18 = 33,592,320
Not Available
Up to 17 volumes can be formatted concurrently. However, 18 or more volumes cannot be formatted. Retry the procedure after the current volume formatting is complete.
330
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Index
A
F
Add Drive Enclosure .............................................. 286
Advanced..................................................... 20, 21, 192
Advanced Copy .............................................. 139, 145
Management ..................................................... 139
Status ................................................................... 61
FC
Set Port Parameters........................................ 254
Setup Host ........................................................ 264
Firefox ................................................................. 11, 307
G
C
GUI ................................................................................ 9
Change Box ID........................................................ 240
Change CM Ownership ......................................... 109
Change Password .................................................... 26
Configure Affinity Group .......................................... 67
Controller Enclosure ................................................ 49
Controller Module ..................................................... 49
copy session............................................................ 163
list ......................................................................... 61
manage.............................................................. 152
Create Volume .......................................................... 66
D
H
host response
set....................................................................... 254
Host Sense.............................................................. 245
Hot Spare
Assign.................................................................. 94
Release ............................................................... 96
I
Define Host................................................................ 66
Define LUN Mapping................................................ 67
Disk....................................................................... 53, 56
maximum number ............................................ 285
Disk Capacity ............................................................ 70
Disk Error Statistics................................................ 300
Display Performance Information ........................ 299
Display SMTP Log.................................................. 213
Drive Enclosure ........................................................ 54
maximum number ............................................ 285
E
EC ............................................................ 139, 140, 158
Eco-mode
Apply Eco-mode Schedule ............................. 108
General Setting................................................. 104
Schedule Setting .............................................. 105
E-Mail ............................................................... 156, 245
E-Mail Address................................................ 212, 219
ETERNUS SF AdvancedCopy Manager ............ 139
ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser ............................ 296
Event Log................................................................. 289
Expander.................................................................... 54
Initialize Snap Data Volume ................................. 126
internal log............................................... 230, 289, 290
Internet Explorer................................................ 11, 302
iSCSI
Set Port Parameters........................................ 257
Setup Host ........................................................ 268
L
LAN ............................................................................... 9
LAN cable.................................................................. 12
LUN ............................................................................ 67
Configure LUN Mapping ................................. 131
LUN Concatenation ......................................... 120
number of LUNs............................................... 132
331
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Index
M
R
Mail Address............................................................ 221
MIB............................................................................ 203
MIB definition file .................................................... 208
MIB View.................................................................. 206
Modify Date and Time............................................ 235
Modify Port Mode ..................................................... 26
Modify REC Buffer.................................................. 188
Modify Storage System Name.............................. 237
Monitor ......................................................... 20, 21, 192
RAID Group
Create............................................................ 66, 88
Delete .................................................................. 93
Status................................................................... 57
RAID level
Number of disks that can be set...................... 88
The maximum number of RAID groups
that can be set................................................ 89
RAID Migration ....................................................... 122
REC Buffer Status.................................................... 65
REC Multiplicity ...................................................... 186
Register ................................................................... 155
Register Copy License .......................................... 155
REMCS ESAT ........................................................ 218
N
Name .......................................................................... 48
NTP server .............................................................. 236
S
O
SAS
Set Port Parameters........................................ 262
Setup Host ........................................................ 271
SAS Cable........................................................... 52, 55
SDP .......................................................................... 144
SDPE ....................................................................... 144
SDPV ....................................................................... 144
Set Copy Path ........................................................ 164
Set Date and Time................................................... 26
Set Port Parameters ........................................ 26, 254
Setup Encryption Mode......................................... 238
Setup Event Notification........................................ 245
Setup Log Sending Parameters .......................... 230
Setup Network Environment .................................. 26
Setup Remote Support.......................................... 218
Site Certificate ........................................................ 302
Snap Data Volume (SDV)..................................... 144
SnapOPC+............................. 126, 143, 152, 156, 162
SNMP Trap ..................................................... 156, 245
SNMP Trap Test .............................................. 209
SSD .......................................................................... 285
Standard ...................................................... 20, 21, 192
Start/Stop Performance Monitoring..................... 296
Stop/Restart Remote Support.............................. 233
Storage System Name
Set........................................................................ 26
OPC ......................................................... 139, 142, 158
Operating Environment............................................ 11
Operating Topology.................................................. 12
P
Port
(for FC model)..................................................... 50
(for iSCSI model)................................................ 51
(for SAS model).................................................. 52
Port Error Statistics ................................................ 301
Power Supply Unit.............................................. 52, 55
Q
QuickOPC........................................................ 143, 162
T
Turn on locator beacon ........................................... 48
332
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Index
U
User Account
Initialize.............................................................. 197
Setup.................................................................. 192
User Management.................................................. 192
User Role................................................................... 20
V
VDS .............................................................. 26, 48, 237
W
web browser .......................................................... 9, 11
When Host Affinity function is not used .............. 253
When the host affinity function is not used........... 67
When the host affinity function is used ................. 67
When using Host Affinity function ........................ 252
Windows Volume Shadow Copy Service ........... 139
333
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
Copyright 2013 FUJITSU LIMITED
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
ETERNUS DX60/DX80/DX90 Web GUI User Guide
P2X0-0700-07ENZ0
Date of issuance: January 2013
Issuance responsibility: FUJITSU LIMITED
•
The content of this manual is subject to change without notice.
•
This manual was prepared with the utmost attention to detail.
However, Fujitsu shall assume no responsibility for any operational problems as the
result of errors, omissions, or the use of information in this manual.
•
Fujitsu assumes no liability for damages to third party copyrights or other rights arising
from the use of any information in this manual.
•
The content of this manual may not be reproduced or distributed in part or in its entirety
without prior permission from Fujitsu.